ld: Extend options for altering orphan handling behaviour.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
0a618243
AB
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
252b5132
RH
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 994@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 997turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
c005eb9e
AB
1004@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005@cindex orphan sections
1006@cindex sections, orphan
1007@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013@table @code
1014@item place
1015Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019@item discard
1020All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023@item warn
1024The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025issue a warning.
1026
1027@item error
1028The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029@end table
1030
1031The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
577a0623
AM
1033@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1042
252b5132
RH
1043@kindex -v
1044@kindex -V
1045@kindex --version
1046@cindex version
1047@item -v
1048@itemx --version
1049@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1050Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1051lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053@kindex -x
1054@kindex --discard-all
1055@cindex deleting local symbols
1056@item -x
1057@itemx --discard-all
1058Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060@kindex -X
1061@kindex --discard-locals
1062@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1063@item -X
252b5132 1064@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1065Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1068
1069@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex symbol tracing
1072@item -y @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081@kindex -Y @var{path}
1082@item -Y @var{path}
1083Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1088The recognized keywords are:
1089@table @samp
1090
1091@item combreloc
1092Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093lookup caching possible.
1094
1095@item defs
560e09e9 1096Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1097shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1098
6aa29e7b
JJ
1099@item execstack
1100Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1101
b039ef04
L
1102@item global
1103This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1104the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1105of subsequently loaded libraries.
1106
cd6d6c15
NC
1107@item initfirst
1108This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1109It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1110before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1111the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1112the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1113objects.
1114
1115@item interpose
1116Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1117but the primary executable.
1118
5fa222e4
AM
1119@item lazy
1120When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1121dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1122the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1123Lazy binding is the default.
1124
cd6d6c15
NC
1125@item loadfltr
1126Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1127runtime.
1128
1129@item muldefs
1130Allows multiple definitions.
1131
1132@item nocombreloc
1133Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1134
1135@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1136Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1137defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1138
1139@item nodefaultlib
1140Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1141ignore any default library search paths.
1142
1143@item nodelete
1144Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1145
1146@item nodlopen
1147Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1148
1149@item nodump
1150Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1151
6aa29e7b
JJ
1152@item noexecstack
1153Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1154
8dfef1bd
L
1155@item text
1156Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1157
1158@item notext
1159Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1160
1161@item textoff
1162Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1163
6aa29e7b
JJ
1164@item norelro
1165Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1166
cd6d6c15
NC
1167@item now
1168When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1169dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1170when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1171deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1172first called.
1173
1174@item origin
1175Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1176
6aa29e7b
JJ
1177@item relro
1178Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1179
24718e3b
L
1180@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1181Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1182
1183@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1184Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1185
04c3a755
NS
1186@item stack-size=@var{value}
1187Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1188Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1189@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1190
d258b828
IZ
1191@item bndplt
1192Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1193
889c2a67
L
1194@item noextern-protected-data
1195Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1196library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1197to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1198generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1199module aren't visibile to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1200i386 and x86-64.
1201
cd6d6c15
NC
1202@end table
1203
ece2d90e 1204Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1205
1206@kindex -(
1207@cindex groups of archives
1208@item -( @var{archives} -)
1209@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1210The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1211either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1212
1213The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1214references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1215the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1216archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1217object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1218would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1219they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1220resolved.
1221
1222Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1223it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1224more archives.
1225
69da35b5
NC
1226@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1227@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1228@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1229@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1230Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1231recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1232and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1233the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1234behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1235so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1236restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1237
4a43e768
AM
1238@kindex --as-needed
1239@kindex --no-as-needed
1240@item --as-needed
1241@itemx --no-as-needed
1242This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1243on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1244the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1245on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1246needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1247emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1248non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1249the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1250non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1251Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1252the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1253needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1254from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1255
e56f61be
L
1256@kindex --add-needed
1257@kindex --no-add-needed
1258@item --add-needed
1259@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1260These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1261their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1262options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1263and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1264
252b5132
RH
1265@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1266@item -assert @var{keyword}
1267This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1268
1269@kindex -Bdynamic
1270@kindex -dy
1271@kindex -call_shared
1272@item -Bdynamic
1273@itemx -dy
1274@itemx -call_shared
1275Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1276for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1277default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1278for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1279multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1280@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1281
a1ab1d2a
UD
1282@kindex -Bgroup
1283@item -Bgroup
1284Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1285section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1286object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1287@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1288only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1289
252b5132
RH
1290@kindex -Bstatic
1291@kindex -dn
1292@kindex -non_shared
1293@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1294@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1295@itemx -dn
1296@itemx -non_shared
1297@itemx -static
1298Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1299platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1300variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1301may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1302library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1303option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1304option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1305shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1306references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1307libraries.
252b5132
RH
1308
1309@kindex -Bsymbolic
1310@item -Bsymbolic
1311When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1312definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1313for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1314within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1315platforms which support shared libraries.
1316
40b36307
L
1317@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1318@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1319When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1320symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1321This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1322libraries.
1323
55255dae
L
1324@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1325@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1326Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1327typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1328global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1329within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1330to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1331in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1332which support shared libraries.
1333
1334The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1335scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1336
40b36307
L
1337@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1338@item --dynamic-list-data
1339Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1340
1341@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1342@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1343Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1344is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1345
0b8a70d9
L
1346@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1347@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1348Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1349
252b5132
RH
1350@kindex --check-sections
1351@kindex --no-check-sections
1352@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1353@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1354Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1355been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1356perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1357suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1358allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1359restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1360Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1361force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1362option.
252b5132 1363
ddbb8a31
NC
1364@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1365@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1366@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1367@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1368This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1369by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1370command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1371output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1372input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1373specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1374follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1375behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1376
1377This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1378libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1379mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1380their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1381required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1382the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1383dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1384symbols.
1385
252b5132
RH
1386@cindex cross reference table
1387@kindex --cref
1388@item --cref
1389Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1390generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1391Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1392
1393The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1394easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1395sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1396symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1397definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1398where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1399symbol are listed.
252b5132 1400
4818e05f
AM
1401@cindex common allocation
1402@kindex --no-define-common
1403@item --no-define-common
1404This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1405The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1406@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1407
1408The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1409the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1410of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1411forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1412Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1413from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1414This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1415and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1416duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1417paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1418
252b5132 1419@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1420@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1421@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1422Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1423address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1424times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1425limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1426context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1427symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1428constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1429using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1430@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1431equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1432
1433@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1434@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1435@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1436@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1437@itemx --no-demangle
1438These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1439and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1440present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1441underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1442mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1443different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1444to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1445demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1446is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1447
1448@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1449@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1450@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1451@item -I@var{file}
1452@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1453Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1454generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1455linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1456doing.
1457
7ce691ae 1458@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1459@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1460@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1461@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1462Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1463with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1464
252b5132
RH
1465@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1466@item --force-exe-suffix
1467Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1468
1469If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1470@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1471the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1472option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1473Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1474it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1475
1476@kindex --gc-sections
1477@kindex --no-gc-sections
1478@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1479@item --gc-sections
1480@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1481Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1482targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1483performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1484@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1485collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1486implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1487
d5465ba2
AM
1488@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1489examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1490symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1491command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1492referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1493libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1494referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1495the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1496relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1497
ac69cbc6 1498This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1499@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1500specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1501a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1502
c17d87de
NC
1503@kindex --print-gc-sections
1504@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1505@cindex garbage collection
1506@item --print-gc-sections
1507@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1508List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1509printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1510collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1511default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1512be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1513line.
1514
30824704
RM
1515@kindex --print-output-format
1516@cindex output format
1517@item --print-output-format
1518Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1519other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1520in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1521
3604cb1f
TG
1522@kindex --print-memory-usage
1523@cindex memory usage
1524@item --print-memory-usage
1525Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1526the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1527quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1528headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1529parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1530
1531@smallexample
1532Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1533 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1534 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1535@end smallexample
1536
252b5132
RH
1537@cindex help
1538@cindex usage
1539@kindex --help
1540@item --help
1541Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1542
ea20a7da
CC
1543@kindex --target-help
1544@item --target-help
1545Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1546
2509a395
SL
1547@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1548@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1549Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1550@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1551
1552@cindex memory usage
1553@kindex --no-keep-memory
1554@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1555@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1556symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1557instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1558necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1559while linking a large executable.
1560
1561@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1562@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1563@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1564@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1565Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1566is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1567The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1568behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1569libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1570
aa713662
L
1571@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1572@kindex -z muldefs
1573@item --allow-multiple-definition
1574@itemx -z muldefs
1575Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1576report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1577first definition will be used.
1578
b79e8c78 1579@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1580@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1581@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1582@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1583Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1584This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1585determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1586shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1587how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1588
903249d7
NC
1589The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1590referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1591an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1592a shared library.
1593
1594The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1595libraries specified at link time are that:
1596
1597@itemize @bullet
1598@item
1599A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1600that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1601resolvable at load time.
1602@item
1603There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1604symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1605
1606The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1607select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1608architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1609appropriate memset function.
1610@end itemize
b79e8c78 1611
31941635
L
1612@kindex --no-undefined-version
1613@item --no-undefined-version
1614Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1615it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1616will be issued instead.
1617
3e3b46e5
PB
1618@kindex --default-symver
1619@item --default-symver
1620Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1621exported symbols.
1622
1623@kindex --default-imported-symver
1624@item --default-imported-symver
1625Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1626imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1627
252b5132
RH
1628@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1629@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1630Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1631files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1632been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1633This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1634errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1635have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1636inappropriate.
1637
fe7929ce
AM
1638@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1639@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1640Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1641library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1642
252b5132
RH
1643@kindex --no-whole-archive
1644@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1645Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1646archive files.
1647
1648@cindex output file after errors
1649@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1650@item --noinhibit-exec
1651Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1652Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1653errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1654when it issues any error whatsoever.
1655
0a9c1c8e
CD
1656@kindex -nostdlib
1657@item -nostdlib
1658Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1659command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1660(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1661
252b5132 1662@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1663@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1664@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1665@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1666file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1667@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1668object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1669object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1670should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1671usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1672name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1673list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1674command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1675this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1676@end ifclear
1677
36af4a4e
JJ
1678@kindex -pie
1679@kindex --pic-executable
1680@item -pie
1681@itemx --pic-executable
1682@cindex position independent executables
1683Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1684ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1685libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1686address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1687normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1688defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1689
252b5132
RH
1690@kindex -qmagic
1691@item -qmagic
1692This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1693
1694@kindex -Qy
1695@item -Qy
1696This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1697
1698@kindex --relax
1699@cindex synthesizing linker
1700@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1701@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1702@item --relax
28d5f677 1703@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1704An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1705@ifset GENERIC
1706This option is only supported on a few targets.
1707@end ifset
1708@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1709@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1710@end ifset
1711@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1712@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1713@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1714@ifset XTENSA
1715@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1716@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1717@ifset M68HC11
1718@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1719@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1720@ifset NIOSII
1721@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1722@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1723@ifset POWERPC
1724@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1725@end ifset
252b5132 1726
28d5f677
NC
1727On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1728global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1729addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1730synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1731instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1732
1733On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1734debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1735@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1736This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1737family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1738@end ifset
1739
1740@ifset GENERIC
1741On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1742but ignored.
1743@end ifset
1744
28d5f677
NC
1745On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1746@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1747
252b5132
RH
1748@cindex retaining specified symbols
1749@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1750@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1751@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1752@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1753Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1754discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1755symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1756@ifset GENERIC
1757(such as VxWorks)
1758@end ifset
1759where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1760run-time memory.
1761
1762@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1763or symbols needed for relocations.
1764
1765You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1766line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1767
1768@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1769@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1770@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1771@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1772Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1773linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1774arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1775them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1776also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1777objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1778@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1779ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1780@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1781
ff5dcc92 1782The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1783SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1784@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1785runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1786options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1787gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1788file systems.
252b5132 1789
ff5dcc92 1790For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1791followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1792the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1793@end ifset
1794
1795@ifset GENERIC
1796@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1797@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1798@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1799When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1800happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1801of the input files.
1802
1803When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1804non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1805shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1806explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1807specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1808@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1809either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1810appearing multiple times.
1811
28c309a2
NC
1812This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1813that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1814is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1815runtime linker would do.
1816
252b5132 1817The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1818libraries:
252b5132
RH
1819@enumerate
1820@item
ff5dcc92 1821Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1822@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1823Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1824between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1825specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1826used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1827at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1828by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1829the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1830@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1831On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1832@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1833environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1834@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1835On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1836directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1837@item
a1b8d843 1838For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1839variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1840@item
ec4eb78a
L
1841For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1842@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1843libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1844@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1845@item
252b5132
RH
1846The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1847@item
1848For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1849exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1850@end enumerate
1851
1852If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1853warning and continue with the link.
1854@end ifset
1855
1856@kindex -shared
1857@kindex -Bshareable
1858@item -shared
1859@itemx -Bshareable
1860@cindex shared libraries
1861Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1862and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1863shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1864undefined symbols in the link.
1865
252b5132 1866@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1867@item --sort-common
1868@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1869@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1870This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1871ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1872sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1873eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1874between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1875specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1876
2509a395
SL
1877@kindex --sort-section=name
1878@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1879This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1880patterns in the linker script.
1881
2509a395
SL
1882@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1883@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1884This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1885patterns in the linker script.
1886
252b5132 1887@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1888@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1889Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1890each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1891size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1892
1893@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1894@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1895Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1896output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1897This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1898certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1899cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1900that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1901support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1902input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1903more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1904many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1905
1906@kindex --stats
1907@item --stats
1908Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1909as execution time and memory usage.
1910
2509a395 1911@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1912@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1913Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1914configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1915that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1916
252b5132
RH
1917@kindex --traditional-format
1918@cindex traditional format
1919@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1920For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1921the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1922use the traditional format instead.
1923
1924@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1925For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1926symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1927full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1928@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1929trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1930combine duplicate entries.
1931
2509a395
SL
1932@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1933@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1934Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1935address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1936times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1937line.
1938@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1939for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1940@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1941should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1942sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1943
2509a395
SL
1944@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1945@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1946@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1947@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1948@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1949@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1950@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1951Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1952@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1953
2509a395
SL
1954@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1955@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1956@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1957When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1958byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1959
9d5777a3
RM
1960@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1961@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1962@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1963When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1964the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1965text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1966
0d705e9f
AM
1967@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1968@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1969@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1970When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1971model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1972
560e09e9
NC
1973@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1974@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1975Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1976values for @samp{method}:
1977
1978@table @samp
1979@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1980Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1981
1982@item report-all
da8bce14 1983Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1984
1985@item ignore-in-object-files
1986Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1987ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1988
1989@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1990Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1991ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1992when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1993libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1994command line.
1995@end table
1996
1997The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1998by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1999
2000Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2001unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2002can change this to a warning.
2003
1715a13c
L
2004@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2005@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2006@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2007@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2008Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2009supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2010the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2011argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2012
2013@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2014@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2015@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2016Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2017used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2018about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2019is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2020see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2021use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2022symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2023@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2024
7ce691ae 2025@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2026@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2027@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2028@item --warn-common
2029Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2030a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2031but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2032you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2033Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2034warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2035
2036There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2037
2038@table @samp
2039@item int i = 1;
2040A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2041file.
2042
2043@item extern int i;
2044An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2045There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2046variable somewhere.
2047
2048@item int i;
2049A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2050variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2051The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2052single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2053size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2054a definition of the same variable.
2055@end table
2056
2057The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2058Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2059just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2060encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2061a common symbol.
2062
2063@enumerate
2064@item
2065Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2066definition for the symbol.
2067@smallexample
2068@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2069 overridden by definition
2070@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2071@end smallexample
2072
2073@item
2074Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2075the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2076except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2077@smallexample
2078@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2079 overriding common
2080@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2081@end smallexample
2082
2083@item
2084Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2085@smallexample
2086@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2087 of `@var{symbol}'
2088@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2089@end smallexample
2090
2091@item
2092Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2093@smallexample
2094@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2095 overridden by larger common
2096@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2097@end smallexample
2098
2099@item
2100Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2101the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2102encountered in a different order.
2103@smallexample
2104@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2105 overriding smaller common
2106@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2107@end smallexample
2108@end enumerate
2109
2110@kindex --warn-constructors
2111@item --warn-constructors
2112Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2113object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2114detect the use of global constructors.
2115
2116@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2117@item --warn-multiple-gp
2118Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2119This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2120Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2121section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2122of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2123base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2124base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2125bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2126large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2127values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2128option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2129
2130@kindex --warn-once
2131@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2132@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2133@item --warn-once
2134Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2135which refers to it.
2136
2137@kindex --warn-section-align
2138@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2139@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2140@item --warn-section-align
2141Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2142alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2143The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2144is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2145the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2146
8fdd7217
NC
2147@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2148@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2149Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2150
a0c402a5
L
2151@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2152@item --warn-alternate-em
2153Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2154
560e09e9
NC
2155@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2156@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2157If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2158@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2159This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2160
2161@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2162@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2163This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2164it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2165
252b5132
RH
2166@kindex --whole-archive
2167@cindex including an entire archive
2168@item --whole-archive
2169For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2170@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2171in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2172files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2173library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2174library. This option may be used more than once.
2175
7ec229ce 2176Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2177about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2178Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2179list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2180your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2181
2509a395
SL
2182@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2183@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2184Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2185@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2186undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2187@var{symbol}.
2188
2189This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2190wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2191wishes to call the system function, it should call
2192@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2193
2194Here is a trivial example:
2195
2196@smallexample
2197void *
cc2f008e 2198__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2199@{
cc2f008e 2200 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2201 return __real_malloc (c);
2202@}
2203@end smallexample
2204
ff5dcc92 2205If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2206all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2207instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2208call the real @code{malloc} function.
2209
2210You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2211links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2212you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2213file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2214call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2215
6aa29e7b
JJ
2216@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2217@item --eh-frame-hdr
2218Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2219@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2220
e41b3a13
JJ
2221@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2222@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2223Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2224generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2225if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2226
6c1439be
L
2227@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2228@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2229@item --enable-new-dtags
2230@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2231This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2232systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2233@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2234and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2235If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2236created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2237those options are only available for ELF systems.
2238
2d643429 2239@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2240@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2241Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2242close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2243time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2244increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2245value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2246
fdc90cb4
JJ
2247@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2248@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2249Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2250@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2251new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2252the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2253hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2254
0ce398f1
L
2255@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2256@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2257@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2258@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2259@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2260@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2261@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2262@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2263On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2264compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
19a7fe52
L
2265compress DWARF debug sections.
2266@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
0ce398f1 2267sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
19a7fe52
L
2268instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2269and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2270compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
0ce398f1 2271
35835446
JR
2272@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2273@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2274This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2275linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2276for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2277about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2278
4f9c04f7 2279Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 22801021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2281run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2282has been used.
2283
2284The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2285enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2286
c0065db7
RM
2287@kindex --build-id
2288@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2289@item --build-id
2290@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2291Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2292or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2293unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2294@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2295@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2296@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2297the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2298string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2299@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2300is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2301
2302The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2303that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2304unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2305to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2306file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2307string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2308
2309Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2310@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2311@end table
2312
0285c67d
NC
2313@c man end
2314
36f63dca 2315@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2316
0285c67d
NC
2317@c man begin OPTIONS
2318
ff5dcc92 2319The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2320the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2321normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2322use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2323@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2324like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2325symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2326object file).
2327
2328In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2329support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2330PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2331values by either a space or an equals sign.
2332
ff5dcc92 2333@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2334
2335@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2336@item --add-stdcall-alias
2337If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2338as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2339[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2340
2341@kindex --base-file
2342@item --base-file @var{file}
2343Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2344addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2345@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2346[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2347
2348@kindex --dll
2349@item --dll
2350Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2351@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2352file.
bb10df36 2353[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2354
88183869
DK
2355@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2356@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2357@item --enable-long-section-names
2358@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2359The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2360the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2361for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2362fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2363to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2364allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2365disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2366generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2367as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2368with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2369GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2370information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2371option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2372section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2373when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2374image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2375[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2376
252b5132
RH
2377@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2378@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2379@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2380@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2381If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2382do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2383only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2384resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2385undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2386@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2387to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2388warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2389import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2390to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2391feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2392@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2393mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2394[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2395
522f09cd
KT
2396@kindex --leading-underscore
2397@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2398@item --leading-underscore
2399@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2400For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2401in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2402disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2403
252b5132
RH
2404@cindex DLLs, creating
2405@kindex --export-all-symbols
2406@item --export-all-symbols
2407If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2408be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2409otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2410explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2411attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2412option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2413@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2414@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2415exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2416re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2417such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2418@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2419@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2420Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2421not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2422extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2423(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2424These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2425@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2426@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2427@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2428@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2429[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2430
2431@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2432@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2433Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2434exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2435[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2436
2927aaca
NC
2437@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2438@item --exclude-all-symbols
2439Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2440[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2441
252b5132
RH
2442@kindex --file-alignment
2443@item --file-alignment
2444Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2445file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2446512.
bb10df36 2447[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2448
2449@cindex heap size
2450@kindex --heap
2451@item --heap @var{reserve}
2452@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2453Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2454to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2455committed.
bb10df36 2456[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2457
2458@cindex image base
2459@kindex --image-base
2460@item --image-base @var{value}
2461Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2462the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2463is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2464your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2465other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2466for dlls.
bb10df36 2467[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2468
2469@kindex --kill-at
2470@item --kill-at
2471If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2472symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2473[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2474
26d2d8a2
BF
2475@kindex --large-address-aware
2476@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2477If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2478header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2479greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2480or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2481section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2482[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2483
f69a2f97
NC
2484@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2485@item --disable-large-address-aware
2486Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2487This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2488driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2489addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2490[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2491
252b5132
RH
2492@kindex --major-image-version
2493@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2494Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2495[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2496
2497@kindex --major-os-version
2498@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2499Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2500[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2501
2502@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2503@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2504Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2505[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2506
2507@kindex --minor-image-version
2508@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2509Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2510[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2511
2512@kindex --minor-os-version
2513@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2514Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2515[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2516
2517@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2518@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2519Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2520[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2521
2522@cindex DEF files, creating
2523@cindex DLLs, creating
2524@kindex --output-def
2525@item --output-def @var{file}
2526The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2527file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2528(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2529library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2530automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2531[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2532
b044cda1
CW
2533@cindex DLLs, creating
2534@kindex --out-implib
2535@item --out-implib @var{file}
2536The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2537import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2538import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2539may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2540makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2541creation step.
bb10df36 2542[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2543
2544@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2545@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2546@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2547Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2548@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2549By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2550for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2551execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2552[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2553
2554@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2555@item --disable-auto-image-base
2556Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2557user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2558default.
bb10df36 2559[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2560
2561@cindex DLLs, linking to
2562@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2563@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2564When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2565search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2566@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2567between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2568uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2569@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2570[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2571
2572@kindex --enable-auto-import
2573@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2574Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2575DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2576building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2577'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2578to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2579specification published by Microsoft.
2580
e2a83dd0
NC
2581Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2582data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2583placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2584around a problem with consts that is described here:
2585http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2586
4d8907ac
DS
2587Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2588see this message:
0d888aac 2589
ece2d90e 2590"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2591documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2592
ece2d90e
NC
2593This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2594ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2595allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2596fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2597constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2598multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2599this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2600of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2601the warning, and exit.
2602
2603There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2604data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2605
2fa9fc65
NC
2606One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2607of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2608this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2609
c0065db7
RM
2610A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2611that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2612there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2613a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2614
2615@example
2616extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2617extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2618 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2619@end example
2620
2621or
2622
2623@example
2624extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2625extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2626 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2627@end example
2628
c0065db7 2629For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2630is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2631
2632@example
2633extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2634extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2635 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2636@end example
2637
c406afaf
NC
2638or
2639
2640@example
2641extern long long extern_ll;
2642extern_ll -->
2643 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2644@end example
2645
2fa9fc65 2646A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2647'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2648@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2649requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2650building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2651merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2652between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2653constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2654
2655Original:
2656@example
2657--foo.h
2658extern int arr[];
2659--foo.c
2660#include "foo.h"
2661void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2662 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2663@}
2664@end example
2665
2666Solution 1:
2667@example
2668--foo.h
2669extern int arr[];
2670--foo.c
2671#include "foo.h"
2672void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2673 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2674 volatile int *parr = arr;
2675 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2676@}
2677@end example
2678
2679Solution 2:
2680@example
2681--foo.h
2682/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2683#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2684 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2685#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2686#else
2687#define FOO_IMPORT
2688#endif
2689extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2690--foo.c
2691#include "foo.h"
2692void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2693 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2694@}
2695@end example
2696
c0065db7 2697A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2698library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2699for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2700functions).
bb10df36 2701[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2702
2703@kindex --disable-auto-import
2704@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2705Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2706@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2707[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2708
2fa9fc65
NC
2709@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2710@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2711If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2712that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2713a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2714environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2715[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2716
2717@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2718@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2719Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2720DLLs.
bb10df36 2721[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2722
b044cda1
CW
2723@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2724@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2725Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2726[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2727
252b5132
RH
2728@kindex --section-alignment
2729@item --section-alignment
2730Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2731addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2732[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2733
2734@cindex stack size
2735@kindex --stack
2736@item --stack @var{reserve}
2737@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2738Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2739to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2740committed.
bb10df36 2741[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2742
2743@kindex --subsystem
2744@item --subsystem @var{which}
2745@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2746@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2747Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2748legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2749@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2750the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2751@var{which}.
bb10df36 2752[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2753
2f563b51
DK
2754The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2755of the PE file header:
2756[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2757
2d5c3743
NC
2758@kindex --high-entropy-va
2759@item --high-entropy-va
2760Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2761(ASLR).
2762
2f563b51
DK
2763@kindex --dynamicbase
2764@item --dynamicbase
2765The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2766randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2767Vista for i386 PE targets.
2768
2769@kindex --forceinteg
2770@item --forceinteg
2771Code integrity checks are enforced.
2772
2773@kindex --nxcompat
2774@item --nxcompat
2775The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2776This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2777
2778@kindex --no-isolation
2779@item --no-isolation
2780Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2781
2782@kindex --no-seh
2783@item --no-seh
2784The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2785this image.
2786
2787@kindex --no-bind
2788@item --no-bind
2789Do not bind this image.
2790
2791@kindex --wdmdriver
2792@item --wdmdriver
2793The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2794
2f563b51
DK
2795@kindex --tsaware
2796@item --tsaware
2797The image is Terminal Server aware.
2798
0cb112f7
CF
2799@kindex --insert-timestamp
2800@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2801@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2802Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2803as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2804other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2805will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2806same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2807can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2808that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2809identically.
252b5132
RH
2810@end table
2811
0285c67d
NC
2812@c man end
2813
ac145307
BS
2814@ifset C6X
2815@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2816
2817@c man begin OPTIONS
2818
2819The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2820libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2821all executables use an index of 0.
2822
2823@table @gcctabopt
2824
2825@kindex --dsbt-size
2826@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2827This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2828or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2829entries.
2830
2831@kindex --dsbt-index
2832@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2833This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2834to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2835executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2836@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2837
fbd9ad90
PB
2838@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2839The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2840exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2841
ac145307
BS
2842@end table
2843
2844@c man end
2845@end ifset
2846
93fd0973
SC
2847@ifset M68HC11
2848@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2849
2850@c man begin OPTIONS
2851
2852The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2853memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2854
2855@table @gcctabopt
2856
2857@kindex --no-trampoline
2858@item --no-trampoline
2859This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2860is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2861instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2862
2863@kindex --bank-window
2864@item --bank-window @var{name}
2865This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2866the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2867The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2868paging and addresses within the memory window.
2869
2870@end table
2871
2872@c man end
2873@end ifset
2874
7fb9f789
NC
2875@ifset M68K
2876@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2877
2878@c man begin OPTIONS
2879
2880The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2881when linking for 68K targets.
2882
2883@table @gcctabopt
2884
2885@kindex --got
2886@item --got=@var{type}
2887This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2888@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2889@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2890Info entry for @file{ld}.
2891
2892@end table
2893
2894@c man end
2895@end ifset
2896
833794fc
MR
2897@ifset MIPS
2898@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2899
2900@c man begin OPTIONS
2901
2902The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2903generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2904
2905@table @gcctabopt
2906
2907@kindex --insn32
2908@item --insn32
2909@kindex --no-insn32
2910@itemx --no-insn32
2911These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2912generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2913or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
291432-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2915used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2916possible.
2917
2918@end table
2919
2920@c man end
2921@end ifset
2922
252b5132
RH
2923@ifset UsesEnvVars
2924@node Environment
2925@section Environment Variables
2926
0285c67d
NC
2927@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2928
560e09e9 2929You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2930@ifclear SingleFormat
2931@code{GNUTARGET},
2932@end ifclear
2933@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2934
36f63dca 2935@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2936@kindex GNUTARGET
2937@cindex default input format
2938@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2939use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2940of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2941@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2942of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2943attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2944this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2945there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2946object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2947BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2948in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2949@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2950
2951@kindex LDEMULATION
2952@cindex default emulation
2953@cindex emulation, default
2954@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2955@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2956behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2957available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2958the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2959variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2960linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2961
2962@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2963@cindex demangling, default
2964Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2965@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2966default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2967a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2968may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2969options.
2970
0285c67d
NC
2971@c man end
2972@end ifset
2973
252b5132
RH
2974@node Scripts
2975@chapter Linker Scripts
2976
2977@cindex scripts
2978@cindex linker scripts
2979@cindex command files
2980Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2981written in the linker command language.
2982
2983The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2984the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2985the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2986more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2987direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2988described below.
2989
2990The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2991yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2992linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2993to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2994such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2995
2996You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2997line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2998default linker script.
2999
3000You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3001to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3002Linker Scripts}.
3003
3004@menu
3005* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3006* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3007* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3008* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3009* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3010* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3011* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3012* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3013* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3014* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3015* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3016@end menu
3017
3018@node Basic Script Concepts
3019@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3020@cindex linker script concepts
3021We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3022describe the linker script language.
3023
3024The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3025file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3026@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3027The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3028purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3029among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3030section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3031in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3032
3033Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3034also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3035contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3036the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3037A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3038area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3039loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3040which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3041of debugging information.
3042
3043Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3044first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3045the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3046@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3047section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3048same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3049is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3050(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3051based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3052RAM address would be the VMA.
3053
3054You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3055program with the @samp{-h} option.
3056
3057Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3058@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3059has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3060information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3061will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3062static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3063referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3064
3065You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3066program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3067option.
3068
3069@node Script Format
3070@section Linker Script Format
3071@cindex linker script format
3072Linker scripts are text files.
3073
3074You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3075either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3076symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3077generally ignored.
3078
3079Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3080If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3081otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3082double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3083file name.
3084
3085You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3086@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3087to whitespace.
3088
3089@node Simple Example
3090@section Simple Linker Script Example
3091@cindex linker script example
3092@cindex example of linker script
3093Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3094
3095The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3096@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3097memory layout of the output file.
3098
3099The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3100describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3101code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3102@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3103Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3104your input files.
3105
3106For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
31070x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3108linker script which will do that:
3109@smallexample
3110SECTIONS
3111@{
3112 . = 0x10000;
3113 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3114 . = 0x8000000;
3115 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3116 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3117@}
3118@end smallexample
3119
3120You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3121followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3122descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3123
252b5132
RH
3124The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3125sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3126counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3127other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3128current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3129incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3130@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3131
3132The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3133required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3134after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3135which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3136wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3137means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3138
3139Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3140@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3141@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3142
3143The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3144the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3145at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3146output section, the value of the location counter will be
3147@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3148effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3149immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3150
3151The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3152alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3153example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3154sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3155may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3156sections.
3157
3158That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3159
3160@node Simple Commands
3161@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3162@cindex linker script simple commands
3163In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3164
3165@menu
3166* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3167* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3168@ifclear SingleFormat
3169* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3170@end ifclear
3171
4a93e180 3172* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3173* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3174@end menu
3175
3176@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3177@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3178@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3179@cindex start of execution
3180@cindex first instruction
3181@cindex entry point
3182The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3183point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3184entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3185@smallexample
3186ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3187@end smallexample
3188
3189There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3190entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3191stopping when one of them succeeds:
3192@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3193@item
252b5132 3194the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3195@item
252b5132 3196the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3197@item
3ab904c4
NC
3198the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3199targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3200check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3201@item
252b5132 3202the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3203@item
252b5132
RH
3204The address @code{0}.
3205@end itemize
3206
3207@node File Commands
36f63dca 3208@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3209@cindex linker script file commands
3210Several linker script commands deal with files.
3211
3212@table @code
3213@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3214@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3215@cindex including a linker script
3216Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3217be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3218with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
321910 levels deep.
3220
4006703d
NS
3221You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3222@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3223
252b5132
RH
3224@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3225@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3226@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3227@cindex input files in linker scripts
3228@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3229@cindex linker script input object files
3230The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3231in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3232
3233For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3234a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3235then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3236
3237In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3238script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3239
e3f2db7f
AO
3240In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3241with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3242located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3243for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3244open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3245linker will search through the archive library search path.
3246The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3247as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3248description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3249
ff5dcc92 3250If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3251name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3252@samp{-l}.
3253
3254When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3255files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3256script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3257
3258@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3259@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3260@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3261@cindex grouping input files
3262The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3263files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3264new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3265in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3266
b717d30e
JJ
3267@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3268@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3269@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3270This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3271commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3272as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3273with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3274when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3275@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3276and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3277setting afterwards.
3278
252b5132
RH
3279@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3280@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3281@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3282The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3283@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3284@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3285Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3286precedence.
3287
3288You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3289output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3290
3291@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3292@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3293@cindex library search path in linker script
3294@cindex archive search path in linker script
3295@cindex search path in linker script
3296The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3297@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3298@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3299on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3300are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3301the command line option are searched first.
3302
3303@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3304@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3305@cindex first input file
3306The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3307that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3308though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3309when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3310first file.
3311@end table
3312
3313@ifclear SingleFormat
3314@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3315@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3316A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3317
3318@table @code
3319@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3320@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3321@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3322@cindex output file format in linker script
3323The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3324output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3325exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3326(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3327line option takes precedence.
3328
3329You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3330formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3331This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3332desired endianness.
3333
3334If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3335will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3336output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3337used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3338
3339For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3340command:
3341@smallexample
3342OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3343@end smallexample
3344This says that the default format for the output file is
3345@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3346option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3347format.
3348
3349@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3350@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3351@cindex input file format in linker script
3352The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3353files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3354This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3355(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3356is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3357command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3358@end table
3359@end ifclear
3360
4a93e180
NC
3361@node REGION_ALIAS
3362@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3363@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3364@cindex region alias
3365@cindex region names
3366
3367Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3368@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3369
3370@smallexample
3371REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3372@end smallexample
3373
3374The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3375memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3376to memory regions. An example follows.
3377
3378Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3379memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3380that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3381non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3382access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3383read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3384sections:
3385
3386@itemize @bullet
3387@item
3388@code{.text} program code;
3389@item
3390@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3391@item
3392@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3393@item
3394@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3395@end itemize
3396
3397The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3398part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3399output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3400systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3401@code{C}:
3402@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3403@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3404@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3405@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3406@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3407@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3408@end multitable
3409The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3410loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3411the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3412the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3413
3414The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3415includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3416memory layout:
3417@smallexample
3418INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3419
3420SECTIONS
3421 @{
3422 .text :
3423 @{
3424 *(.text)
3425 @} > REGION_TEXT
3426 .rodata :
3427 @{
3428 *(.rodata)
3429 rodata_end = .;
3430 @} > REGION_RODATA
3431 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3432 @{
3433 data_start = .;
3434 *(.data)
3435 @} > REGION_DATA
3436 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3437 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3438 .bss :
3439 @{
3440 *(.bss)
3441 @} > REGION_BSS
3442 @}
3443@end smallexample
3444
3445Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3446regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3447variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3448@table @code
3449@item A
3450Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3451@smallexample
3452MEMORY
3453 @{
3454 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3455 @}
3456
3457REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3458REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3459REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3460REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3461@end smallexample
3462@item B
3463Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3464into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3465@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3466@smallexample
3467MEMORY
3468 @{
3469 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3470 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3471 @}
3472
3473REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3474REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3475REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3476REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3477@end smallexample
3478@item C
3479Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3480@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3481initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3482system start into the @code{RAM}.
3483@smallexample
3484MEMORY
3485 @{
3486 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3487 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3488 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3489 @}
3490
3491REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3492REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3493REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3494REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3495@end smallexample
3496@end table
3497
3498It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3499@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3500necessary:
3501@smallexample
3502#include <string.h>
3503
3504extern char data_start [];
3505extern char data_size [];
3506extern char data_load_start [];
3507
3508void copy_data(void)
3509@{
3510 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3511 @{
3512 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3513 @}
3514@}
3515@end smallexample
3516
252b5132 3517@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3518@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3519There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3520
3521@table @code
3522@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3523@kindex ASSERT
3524@cindex assertion in linker script
3525Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3526with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3527
fd1c4238
NC
3528Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3529take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3530inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3531for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3532symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3533
3534@smallexample
3535 .stack :
3536 @{
3537 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3538 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3539 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3540 @}
3541@end smallexample
3542
3543will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3544PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3545can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3546
3547@smallexample
3548 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3549 .stack :
3550 @{
3551 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3552 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3553 @}
3554@end smallexample
3555
3556will work.
3557
252b5132
RH
3558@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3559@kindex EXTERN
3560@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3561Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3562symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3563modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3564each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3565command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3566
3567@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3568@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3569@cindex common allocation in linker script
3570This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3571to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3572output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3573
4818e05f
AM
3574@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3575@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3576@cindex common allocation in linker script
3577This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3578command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3579to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3580
53d25da6
AM
3581@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3582@kindex INSERT
3583@cindex insert user script into default script
3584This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3585augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3586inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3587@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3588default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3589sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3590linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3591insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3592linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3593default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3594of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3595to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3596is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3597
3598@smallexample
3599SECTIONS
3600@{
3601 OVERLAY :
3602 @{
3603 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3604 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3605 @}
3606@}
3607INSERT AFTER .text;
3608@end smallexample
3609
252b5132
RH
3610@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3611@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3612@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3613This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3614references among certain output sections.
3615
3616In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3617using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3618will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3619errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3620a function defined in the other section.
3621
3622The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3623@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3624an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3625@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3626names.
3627
3628@ifclear SingleFormat
3629@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3630@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3631@cindex machine architecture
3632@cindex architecture
3633Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3634of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3635architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3636the @samp{-f} option.
3637@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3638
3639@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3640@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3641This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3642@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3643in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3644@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3645@end table
3646
3647@node Assignments
3648@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3649@cindex assignment in scripts
3650@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3651@cindex variables, defining
3652You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3653the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3654
3655@menu
3656* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3657* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3658* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3659* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3660* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3661@end menu
3662
3663@node Simple Assignments
3664@subsection Simple Assignments
3665
3666You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3667
3668@table @code
3669@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3670@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3671@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3672@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3673@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3674@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3675@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3676@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3677@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3678@end table
3679
3680The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3681@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3682defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3683
3684The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3685may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3686
3687The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3688
3689Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3690
3691You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3692statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3693section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3694
3695The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3696expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3697
3698Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3699assignments may be used:
3700
3701@smallexample
3702floating_point = 0;
3703SECTIONS
3704@{
3705 .text :
3706 @{
3707 *(.text)
3708 _etext = .;
3709 @}
156e34dd 3710 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3711 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3712@}
3713@end smallexample
3714@noindent
3715In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3716zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3717the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3718defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3719upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3720
eb8476a6
MR
3721@node HIDDEN
3722@subsection HIDDEN
3723@cindex HIDDEN
3724For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3725exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3726
3727Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3728@code{HIDDEN}:
3729
3730@smallexample
3731HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3732SECTIONS
3733@{
3734 .text :
3735 @{
3736 *(.text)
3737 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3738 @}
3739 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3740 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3741@}
3742@end smallexample
3743@noindent
3744In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3745
252b5132
RH
3746@node PROVIDE
3747@subsection PROVIDE
3748@cindex PROVIDE
3749In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3750only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3751the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3752@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3753@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3754@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3755@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3756@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3757
3758Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3759@smallexample
3760SECTIONS
3761@{
3762 .text :
3763 @{
3764 *(.text)
3765 _etext = .;
3766 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3767 @}
3768@}
3769@end smallexample
3770
3771In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3772underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3773the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3774underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3775If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3776linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3777
7af8e998
L
3778@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3779@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3780@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3781Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3782hidden and won't be exported.
3783
73ae6183
NC
3784@node Source Code Reference
3785@subsection Source Code Reference
3786
3787Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3788intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3789a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3790symbol that does not have a value.
3791
3792Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3793transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3794stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3795prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3796mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3797of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3798variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3799linker script variable might be referred to as:
3800
3801@smallexample
3802 extern int foo;
3803@end smallexample
3804
3805But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3806
3807@smallexample
3808 _foo = 1000;
3809@end smallexample
3810
3811In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3812transformation has taken place.
3813
3814When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3815things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3816in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3817second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3818table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3819contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3820value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3821
3822@smallexample
3823 int foo = 1000;
3824@end smallexample
3825
10bf6894 3826creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3827holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3828number 1000 is initially stored.
3829
3830When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3831first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3832memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3833So:
3834
3835@smallexample
3836 foo = 1;
3837@end smallexample
3838
3839looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3840associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3841address. Whereas:
3842
3843@smallexample
3844 int * a = & foo;
3845@end smallexample
3846
10bf6894 3847looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3848and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3849the variable @samp{a}.
3850
3851Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3852the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3853an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3854
3855@smallexample
3856 foo = 1000;
3857@end smallexample
3858
3859creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3860the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3861address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3862linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3863access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3864
3865Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3866you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3867use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3868section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3869linker script contains these declarations:
3870
3871@smallexample
3872@group
3873 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3874 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3875 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3876@end group
3877@end smallexample
3878
3879Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3880
3881@smallexample
3882@group
3883 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3884
73ae6183
NC
3885 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3886@end group
3887@end smallexample
3888
3889Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3890
252b5132 3891@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3892@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3893@kindex SECTIONS
3894The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3895into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3896
3897The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3898@smallexample
3899SECTIONS
3900@{
3901 @var{sections-command}
3902 @var{sections-command}
3903 @dots{}
3904@}
3905@end smallexample
3906
3907Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3908
3909@itemize @bullet
3910@item
3911an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3912@item
3913a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3914@item
3915an output section description
3916@item
3917an overlay description
3918@end itemize
3919
3920The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3921@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3922those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3923understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3924the layout of the output file.
3925
3926Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3927below.
3928
3929If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3930linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3931section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3932input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3933example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3934in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3935
3936@menu
3937* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3938* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3939* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3940* Input Section:: Input section description
3941* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3942* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3943* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3944* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3945* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3946@end menu
3947
3948@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3949@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3950The full description of an output section looks like this:
3951@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3952@group
7e7d5768 3953@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3954 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3955 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3956 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3957 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3958 @{
3959 @var{output-section-command}
3960 @var{output-section-command}
3961 @dots{}
abc9061b 3962 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3963@end group
3964@end smallexample
3965
3966Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3967
3968The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3969name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3970The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3971the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3972The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3973
3974Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3975
3976@itemize @bullet
3977@item
3978a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3979@item
3980an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3981@item
3982data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3983@item
3984a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3985@end itemize
3986
3987@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3988@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3989@cindex name, section
3990@cindex section name
3991The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3992meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3993support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3994must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3995example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3996output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3997names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3998quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3999characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4000commas must be quoted.
4001
4002The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4003Discarding}.
4004
4005@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4006@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4007@cindex address, section
4008@cindex section address
4009The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4010address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4011is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4012
4013If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4014section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4015to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4016alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4017contained within the output section.
4018
4019The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4020
4021@itemize @bullet
4022@item
4023If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4024is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4025in that region.
4026
4027@item
4028If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4029regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4030section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4031be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4032
4033@item
4034If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4035the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4036counter.
4037@end itemize
4038
4039@noindent
4040For example:
4041
252b5132
RH
4042@smallexample
4043.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4044@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4045
252b5132
RH
4046@noindent
4047and
ea5cae92 4048
252b5132
RH
4049@smallexample
4050.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4051@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4052
252b5132
RH
4053@noindent
4054are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4055@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4056counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4057counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4058input sections.
252b5132
RH
4059
4060The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4061For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4062so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4063do something like this:
4064@smallexample
4065.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4066@end smallexample
4067@noindent
4068This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4069aligned upward to the specified value.
4070
4071Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4072location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4073sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4074
4075@node Input Section
36f63dca 4076@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4077@cindex input sections
4078@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4079The most common output section command is an input section description.
4080
4081The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4082You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4083in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4084map the input files into your memory layout.
4085
4086@menu
4087* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4088* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4089* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4090* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4091* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4092@end menu
4093
4094@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4095@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4096@cindex input section basics
4097An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4098by a list of section names in parentheses.
4099
4100The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4101describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4102
4103The most common input section description is to include all input
4104sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4105include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4106@smallexample
4107*(.text)
4108@end smallexample
4109@noindent
18625d54
CM
4110Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4111of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4112match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4113example:
252b5132 4114@smallexample
b4346c09 4115*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4116@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4117will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4118@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4119
4120There are two ways to include more than one section:
4121@smallexample
4122*(.text .rdata)
4123*(.text) *(.rdata)
4124@end smallexample
4125@noindent
4126The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4127@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4128first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4129they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4130@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4131@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4132
4133You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4134You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4135needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4136@smallexample
4137data.o(.data)
4138@end smallexample
4139
ae17ab41
CM
4140To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4141of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4142
4143Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4144
4145@smallexample
4146@group
4147SECTIONS @{
4148 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4149 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4150@}
4151@end group
4152@end smallexample
4153
4154In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4155input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4156@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4157@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4158whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4159
967928e9
AM
4160You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4161matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4162with no whitespace around the colon.
4163
4164@table @samp
4165@item archive:file
4166matches file within archive
4167@item archive:
4168matches the whole archive
4169@item :file
4170matches file but not one in an archive
4171@end table
4172
4173Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4174wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4175single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4176@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4177within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4178also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4179other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4180from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4181command.
4182
252b5132
RH
4183If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4184the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4185commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4186@smallexample
4187data.o
4188@end smallexample
4189
967928e9
AM
4190When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4191and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4192characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4193name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4194did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4195though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4196@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4197the archive search path.
4198
4199@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4200@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4201@cindex input section wildcards
4202@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4203@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4204@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4205In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4206name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4207
4208The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4209pattern for the file name.
4210
4211The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4212
4213@table @samp
4214@item *
4215matches any number of characters
4216@item ?
4217matches any single character
4218@item [@var{chars}]
4219matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4220character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4221@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4222@item \
4223quotes the following character
4224@end table
4225
4226When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4227will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4228Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4229exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4230@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4231a @samp{/} character.
4232
4233File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4234specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4235does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4236
4237If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4238appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4239will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4240sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4241@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4242@smallexample
4243.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4244.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4245@end smallexample
4246
bcaa7b3e 4247@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4248Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4249in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4250this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4251pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4252@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4253into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4254
bcaa7b3e
L
4255@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4256@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4257difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4258descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4259Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4260reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4261
02ecc8e9
L
4262@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4263@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4264difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4265ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4266encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4267
bcaa7b3e
L
4268@cindex SORT
4269@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4270
4271When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4272can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4273
4274@enumerate
4275@item
4276@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4277It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4278sections have the same name.
4279@item
4280@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4281It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4282sections have the same alignment.
4283@item
c0065db7 4284@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4285treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4286@item
4287@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4288is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4289@item
4290All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4291@end enumerate
4292
4293When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4294section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4295takes precedence over the command line option.
4296
4297If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4298command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4299treated as nested sorting command.
4300
4301@enumerate
4302@item
4303@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4304@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4305@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4306@item
4307@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4308@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4309@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4310@end enumerate
4311
4312If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4313command line option will be ignored.
4314
eda680f8
L
4315@cindex SORT_NONE
4316@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4317section sorting option.
4318
252b5132
RH
4319If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4320@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4321precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4322
4323This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4324files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4325sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4326The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4327with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4328linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4329@smallexample
4330@group
4331SECTIONS @{
4332 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4333 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4334 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4335 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4336@}
4337@end group
4338@end smallexample
4339
4340@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4341@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4342@cindex common symbol placement
4343@cindex uninitialized data placement
4344A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4345file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4346linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4347named @samp{COMMON}.
4348
4349You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4350other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4351particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4352input files are placed in another section.
4353
4354In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4355@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4356@smallexample
4357.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4358@end smallexample
4359
4360@cindex scommon section
4361@cindex small common symbols
4362Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4363example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4364symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4365different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4366the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4367symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4368to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4369locations.
4370
4371@cindex [COMMON]
4372You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4373notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4374@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4375
4376@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4377@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4378@cindex KEEP
4379@cindex garbage collection
4380When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4381it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4382This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4383with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4384@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4385
4386@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4387@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4388The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4389to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4390start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4391@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4392follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4393@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4394@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4395All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4396files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4397
4398@smallexample
4399@group
4400SECTIONS @{
4401 outputa 0x10000 :
4402 @{
4403 all.o
4404 foo.o (.input1)
4405 @}
36f63dca
NC
4406@end group
4407@group
252b5132
RH
4408 outputb :
4409 @{
4410 foo.o (.input2)
4411 foo1.o (.input1)
4412 @}
36f63dca
NC
4413@end group
4414@group
252b5132
RH
4415 outputc :
4416 @{
4417 *(.input1)
4418 *(.input2)
4419 @}
4420@}
4421@end group
a1ab1d2a 4422@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4423
4424@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4425@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4426@cindex data
4427@cindex section data
4428@cindex output section data
4429@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4430@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4431@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4432@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4433@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4434You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4435@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4436an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4437parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4438value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4439counter.
4440
4441The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4442store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4443bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4444stored.
4445
4446For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4447of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4448@smallexample
4449BYTE(1)
4450LONG(addr)
4451@end smallexample
4452
4453When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4454same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4455target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4456@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4457@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4458
4459If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4460which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4461When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4462true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4463endianness of the first input object file.
4464
36f63dca 4465Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4466between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4467@smallexample
4468SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4469@end smallexample
4470whereas this will work:
4471@smallexample
4472SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4473@end smallexample
4474
252b5132
RH
4475@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4476@cindex holes, filling
4477@cindex unspecified memory
4478You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4479current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4480otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4481gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4482with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4483necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4484point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4485than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4486different parts of an output section.
4487
4488This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4489value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4490@smallexample
563e308f 4491FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4492@end smallexample
4493
4494The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4495section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4496part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4497entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4498precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4499expression.
252b5132
RH
4500
4501@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4502@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4503There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4504commands.
4505
4506@table @code
4507@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4508@cindex input filename symbols
4509@cindex filename symbols
4510@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4511The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4512The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4513file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4514the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4515
4516This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4517normally used for any other object file format.
4518
4519@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4520@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4521@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4522@item CONSTRUCTORS
4523When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4524unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4525destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4526arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4527automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4528For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4529linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4530@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4531ignored for other object file formats.
4532
4533The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4534constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4535Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4536the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4537first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4538of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4539compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4540formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4541@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4542the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4543destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4544@code{exit}.
4545
4546For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4547arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4548addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4549and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4550linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4551runtime code expects to see.
4552
4553@smallexample
4554 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4555 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4556 *(.ctors)
4557 LONG(0)
4558 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4559 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4560 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4561 *(.dtors)
4562 LONG(0)
4563 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4564@end smallexample
4565
4566If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4567which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4568are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4569are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4570command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4571@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4572@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4573@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4574
4575Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4576and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4577need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4578scripts.
4579
4580@end table
4581
4582@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4583@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4584@cindex discarding sections
4585@cindex sections, discarding
4586@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4587The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4588This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4589may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4590@smallexample
49c13adb 4591.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4592@end smallexample
4593@noindent
4594will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4595@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4596sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4597space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4598too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4599space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4600@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4601@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4602This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4603
a0976ea4 4604The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4605on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4606symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4607the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4608section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4609
4610@cindex /DISCARD/
4611The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4612input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4613section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4614
4615@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4616@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4617@cindex output section attributes
4618We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4619like this:
0c71d759 4620
252b5132 4621@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4622@group
7e7d5768 4623@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4624 [AT(@var{lma})]
4625 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4626 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4627 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4628 @{
4629 @var{output-section-command}
4630 @var{output-section-command}
4631 @dots{}
562d3460 4632 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4633@end group
4634@end smallexample
0c71d759 4635
252b5132
RH
4636We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4637@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4638remaining section attributes.
4639
a1ab1d2a 4640@menu
252b5132
RH
4641* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4642* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4643* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4644* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4645* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4646* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4647* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4648* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4649@end menu
4650
4651@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4652@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4653Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4654parentheses. The following types are defined:
4655
4656@table @code
4657@item NOLOAD
4658The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4659loaded into memory when the program is run.
4660@item DSECT
4661@itemx COPY
4662@itemx INFO
4663@itemx OVERLAY
4664These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4665rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4666marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4667section when the program is run.
4668@end table
4669
4670@kindex NOLOAD
4671@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4672@cindex loading, preventing
4673The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4674the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4675the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4676@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4677need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4678@smallexample
4679@group
4680SECTIONS @{
4681 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4682 @dots{}
4683@}
4684@end group
4685@end smallexample
4686
4687@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4688@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4689@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4690@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4691@cindex load address
4692@cindex section load address
4693Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4694@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4695@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4696specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4697address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4698
ea5cae92
NC
4699The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4700specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4701takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4702load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4703region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4704
4705If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4706section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4707load address:
4708
4709@itemize @bullet
4710@item
4711If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4712the LMA address as well.
4713
4714@item
4715If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4716
4717@item
4718Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4719with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4720section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4721VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4722the last section in the located region.
4723
4724@item
4725If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4726that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4727
4728@item
4729If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4730section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4731@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4732
4733@cindex ROM initialized data
4734@cindex initialized data in ROM
4735This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4736example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4737called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4738@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4739even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4740uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4741defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4742counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4743
4744@smallexample
4745@group
4746SECTIONS
4747 @{
4748 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4749 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4750 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4751 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4752 .bss 0x3000 :
4753 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4754@}
4755@end group
4756@end smallexample
4757
4758The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4759this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4760the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4761how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4762script.
4763
4764@smallexample
4765@group
4766extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4767char *src = &_etext;
4768char *dst = &_data;
4769
ea5cae92
NC
4770/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4771while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4772 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4773
ea5cae92 4774/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4775for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4776 *dst = 0;
4777@end group
4778@end smallexample
4779
bbf115d3
L
4780@node Forced Output Alignment
4781@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4782@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4783@cindex forcing output section alignment
4784@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4785You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4786alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4787intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4788
7e7d5768
AM
4789@node Forced Input Alignment
4790@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4791@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4792@cindex forcing input section alignment
4793@cindex input section alignment
4794You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4795SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4796sections, whether larger or smaller.
4797
0c71d759
NC
4798@node Output Section Constraint
4799@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4800@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4801@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4802@cindex constraints on output sections
4803You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4804of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4805read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4806@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4807
252b5132 4808@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4809@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4810@kindex >@var{region}
4811@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4812@cindex memory regions and sections
4813You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4814using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4815
4816Here is a simple example:
4817@smallexample
4818@group
4819MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4820SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4821@end group
4822@end smallexample
4823
4824@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4825@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4826@kindex :@var{phdr}
4827@cindex section, assigning to program header
4828@cindex program headers and sections
4829You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4830using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4831one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4832assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4833@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4834linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4835
4836Here is a simple example:
4837@smallexample
4838@group
4839PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4840SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4841@end group
4842@end smallexample
4843
4844@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4845@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4846@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4847@cindex section fill pattern
4848@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4849You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4850@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4851(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4852within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4853alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4854necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4855of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4856an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4857fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4858other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4859pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4860expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4861
4862You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4863output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4864
4865Here is a simple example:
4866@smallexample
4867@group
563e308f 4868SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4869@end group
4870@end smallexample
4871
4872@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4873@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4874@kindex OVERLAY
4875@cindex overlays
4876An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4877are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4878the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4879copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4880required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4881can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4882than another.
4883
4884Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4885@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4886output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4887command is as follows:
4888@smallexample
4889@group
4890OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4891 @{
4892 @var{secname1}
4893 @{
4894 @var{output-section-command}
4895 @var{output-section-command}
4896 @dots{}
4897 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4898 @var{secname2}
4899 @{
4900 @var{output-section-command}
4901 @var{output-section-command}
4902 @dots{}
4903 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4904 @dots{}
abc9061b 4905 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4906@end group
4907@end smallexample
4908
4909Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4910section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4911section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4912those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4913except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4914sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4915
abc9061b
CC
4916The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4917the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4918
252b5132
RH
4919The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4920addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4921memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4922whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4923and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4924and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4925
56dd11f0
NC
4926If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4927references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4928the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4929sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4930@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4931
4932For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4933provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4934defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4935@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4936the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4937within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4938symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4939
4940At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4941the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4942
4943Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4944@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4945@smallexample
4946@group
4947 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4948 @{
4949 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4950 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4951 @}
4952@end group
4953@end smallexample
4954@noindent
4955This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4956address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4957@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4958following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4959@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4960@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4961
4962C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4963like the following.
4964
4965@smallexample
4966@group
4967 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4968 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4969 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4970@end group
4971@end smallexample
4972
4973Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4974everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4975example could have been written identically as follows.
4976
4977@smallexample
4978@group
4979 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4980 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4981 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4982 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4983 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4984 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4985 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4986@end group
4987@end smallexample
4988
4989@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4990@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4991@kindex MEMORY
4992@cindex memory regions
4993@cindex regions of memory
4994@cindex allocating memory
4995@cindex discontinuous memory
4996The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4997memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4998
4999The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5000memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5001may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5002can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5003set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5004regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5005around to fit into the available regions.
5006
127fcdff
AB
5007A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5008however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5009specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5010@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5011@smallexample
5012@group
a1ab1d2a 5013MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5014 @{
5015 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5016 @dots{}
5017 @}
5018@end group
5019@end smallexample
5020
5021The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5022region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5023Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5024with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5025must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5026add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5027command.
252b5132
RH
5028
5029@cindex memory region attributes
5030The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5031whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5032not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5033@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5034section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5035the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5036them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5037
5038The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5039@table @samp
5040@item R
5041Read-only section
5042@item W
5043Read/write section
5044@item X
5045Executable section
5046@item A
5047Allocatable section
5048@item I
5049Initialized section
5050@item L
5051Same as @samp{I}
5052@item !
c09e9a8c 5053Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5054@end table
5055
5056If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5057@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5058attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5059in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5060attributes.
5061
5062@kindex ORIGIN =
5063@kindex o =
5064@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5065The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5066the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5067cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5068abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5069@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5070
5071@kindex LENGTH =
5072@kindex len =
5073@kindex l =
5074The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5075region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5076be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5077@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5078
5079In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5080available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5081and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5082linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5083is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5084or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5085explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5086region.
5087
5088@smallexample
5089@group
a1ab1d2a 5090MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5091 @{
5092 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5093 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5094 @}
5095@end group
5096@end smallexample
5097
5098Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5099specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5100@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5101a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5102output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5103was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5104the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5105output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5106region, the linker will issue an error message.
5107
3ec57632 5108It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5109expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5110@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5111
5112@smallexample
5113@group
c0065db7 5114 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5115@end group
5116@end smallexample
5117
252b5132
RH
5118@node PHDRS
5119@section PHDRS Command
5120@kindex PHDRS
5121@cindex program headers
5122@cindex ELF program headers
5123@cindex program segments
5124@cindex segments, ELF
5125The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5126@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5127loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5128program with the @samp{-p} option.
5129
5130When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5131reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5132program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5133This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5134interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5135
5136The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5137in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5138precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5139the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5140not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5141
5142The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5143generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5144ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5145
5146This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5147@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5148
5149@smallexample
5150@group
5151PHDRS
5152@{
5153 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5154 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5155@}
5156@end group
5157@end smallexample
5158
5159The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5160of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5161header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5162with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5163must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5164is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5165
5166Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5167system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5168specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5169sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5170attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5171Section Phdr}.
5172
5173It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5174merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5175repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5176contain the section.
5177
5178If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5179then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5180not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5181convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5182placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5183default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5184segment at all.
5185
5186@kindex FILEHDR
5187@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5188You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5189the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5190The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5191file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5192include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5193segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5194these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5195
5196The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5197value of the keyword.
5198
5199@table @asis
5200@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5201Indicates an unused program header.
5202
5203@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5204Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5205the file.
5206
5207@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5208Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5209
5210@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5211Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5212found.
5213
5214@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5215Indicates a segment holding note information.
5216
5217@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5218A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5219ABI.
5220
5221@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5222Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5223
5224@item @var{expression}
5225An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5226be used for types not defined above.
5227@end table
5228
5229You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5230in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5231@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5232Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5233output section attribute.
5234
5235The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5236which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5237explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5238an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5239header.
5240
5241Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5242headers used on a native ELF system.
5243
5244@example
5245@group
5246PHDRS
5247@{
5248 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5249 interp PT_INTERP ;
5250 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5251 data PT_LOAD ;
5252 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5253@}
5254
5255SECTIONS
5256@{
5257 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5258 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5259 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5260 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5261 @dots{}
5262 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5263 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5264 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5265 @dots{}
5266@}
5267@end group
5268@end example
5269
5270@node VERSION
5271@section VERSION Command
5272@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5273@cindex symbol versions
5274@cindex version script
5275@cindex versions of symbols
5276The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5277only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5278symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5279a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5280shared library.
5281
5282You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5283you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5284also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5285
5286The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5287@smallexample
5288VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5289@end smallexample
5290
5291The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5292Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5293version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5294version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5295version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5296scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5297library.
5298
5299The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5300examples.
5301
5302@smallexample
5303VERS_1.1 @{
5304 global:
5305 foo1;
5306 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5307 old*;
5308 original*;
5309 new*;
252b5132
RH
5310@};
5311
5312VERS_1.2 @{
5313 foo2;
5314@} VERS_1.1;
5315
5316VERS_2.0 @{
5317 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5318 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5319 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5320 "f(int, double)";
5321 @};
252b5132
RH
5322@} VERS_1.2;
5323@end smallexample
5324
5325This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5326version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5327The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5328a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5329of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5330symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5331is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5332in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5333However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5334name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5335
5336Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5337depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5338to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5339
5340Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5341depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5342and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5343
5344When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5345specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5346unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5347unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5348somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5349wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5350wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5351set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5352ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5353
5354The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5355they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5356could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5357However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5358
0f6bf451 5359Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5360in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5361symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5362won't.
5363
5364@smallexample
7c9c73be 5365@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5366@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5367
252b5132
RH
5368When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5369symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5370requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5371shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5372loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5373linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5374application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5375way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5376all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5377search for each symbol reference.
5378
5379The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5380doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5381that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5382functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5383the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5384required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5385that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5386versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5387the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5388
5389There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5390first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5391source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5392script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5393maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5394@smallexample
5395__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5396@end smallexample
5397@noindent
5398in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5399be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5400The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5401@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5402takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5403
5404The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5405function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5406an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5407version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5408linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5409
5410To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5411source file. Here is an example:
5412
5413@smallexample
5414__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5415__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5416__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5417__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5418@end smallexample
5419
5420In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5421unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5422example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5423@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5424
5425When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5426some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5427this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5428@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5429declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5430you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5431
5432If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5433within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5434(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5435specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5436
cb840a31
L
5437You can also specify the language in the version script:
5438
5439@smallexample
5440VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5441@end smallexample
5442
c0065db7 5443The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5444The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5445demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5446patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5447@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5448
86043bbb
MM
5449Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5450described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5451or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5452the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5453whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5454cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5455might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5456should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5457expect when you upgrade.
5458
252b5132
RH
5459@node Expressions
5460@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5461@cindex expressions
5462@cindex arithmetic
5463The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5464that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5465expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5466host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5467
5468You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5469
5470The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5471expressions.
5472
5473@menu
5474* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5475* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5476* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5477* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5478* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5479* Operators:: Operators
5480* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5481* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5482* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5483@end menu
5484
5485@node Constants
5486@subsection Constants
5487@cindex integer notation
5488@cindex constants in linker scripts
5489All constants are integers.
5490
5491As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5492octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5493hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5494@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5495@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5496value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5497
5498@cindex scaled integers
5499@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5500@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5501@cindex suffixes for integers
5502@cindex integer suffixes
5503In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5504constant by
5505@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5506@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5507@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5508@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5509@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5510@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5511@tex
5512${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5513@end tex
5514@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5515respectively. For example, the following
5516all refer to the same quantity:
5517
252b5132 5518@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5519_fourk_1 = 4K;
5520_fourk_2 = 4096;
5521_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5522_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5523@end smallexample
5524
8a308ae8
NC
5525Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5526conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5527
0c71d759
NC
5528@node Symbolic Constants
5529@subsection Symbolic Constants
5530@cindex symbolic constants
5531@kindex CONSTANT
5532It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5533the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5534
5535@table @code
5536@item MAXPAGESIZE
5537@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5538The target's maximum page size.
5539
5540@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5541@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5542The target's default page size.
5543@end table
5544
5545So for example:
5546
5547@smallexample
9d5777a3 5548 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5549@end smallexample
5550
5551will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5552supported by the target.
5553
252b5132
RH
5554@node Symbols
5555@subsection Symbol Names
5556@cindex symbol names
5557@cindex names
5558@cindex quoted symbol names
5559@kindex "
5560Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5561and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5562Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5563specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5564keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5565@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5566"SECTION" = 9;
5567"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5568@end smallexample
5569
5570Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5571to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5572whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5573
ecca9871
L
5574@node Orphan Sections
5575@subsection Orphan Sections
5576@cindex orphan
5577Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5578are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5579script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5580output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5581placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5582attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5583same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5584If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5585at the end of the file.
5586
5587For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5588well as section flag.
5589
c005eb9e
AB
5590The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5591(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5592output sections an orphan is placed in.
5593
41911f68 5594If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5595the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5596__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5597section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5598orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5599representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5600character.
5601
252b5132
RH
5602@node Location Counter
5603@subsection The Location Counter
5604@kindex .
5605@cindex dot
5606@cindex location counter
5607@cindex current output location
5608The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5609current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5610location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5611within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5612anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5613
5614@cindex holes
5615Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5616moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5617location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5618and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5619doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5620
5621@smallexample
5622SECTIONS
5623@{
5624 output :
5625 @{
5626 file1(.text)
5627 . = . + 1000;
5628 file2(.text)
5629 . += 1000;
5630 file3(.text)
563e308f 5631 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5632@}
5633@end smallexample
5634@noindent
5635In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5636located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5637followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5638@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5639@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5640specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5641
5c6bbab8
NC
5642@cindex dot inside sections
5643Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5644current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5645statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5646absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5647however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5648not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5649
5650@smallexample
5651SECTIONS
5652@{
5653 . = 0x100
5654 .text: @{
5655 *(.text)
5656 . = 0x200
5657 @}
5658 . = 0x500
5659 .data: @{
5660 *(.data)
5661 . += 0x600
5662 @}
5663@}
5664@end smallexample
5665
5666The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5667and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5668the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5669much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5670move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5671and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5672the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5673the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5674
b5666f2f
AM
5675@cindex dot outside sections
5676Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5677output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5678needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5679
5680@smallexample
5681SECTIONS
5682@{
5683 start_of_text = . ;
5684 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5685 end_of_text = . ;
5686
5687 start_of_data = . ;
5688 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5689 end_of_data = . ;
5690@}
5691@end smallexample
5692
5693If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5694not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5695between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5696should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5697blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5698the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5699sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5700statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5701special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5702place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5703as follows:
5704
5705@smallexample
5706SECTIONS
5707@{
5708 start_of_text = . ;
5709 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5710 end_of_text = . ;
5711
5712 start_of_data = . ;
5713 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5714 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5715 end_of_data = . ;
5716@}
5717@end smallexample
5718
5719This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5720@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5721placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5722assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5723a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5724section. So you could write:
5725
5726@smallexample
5727SECTIONS
5728@{
5729 start_of_text = . ;
5730 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5731 end_of_text = . ;
5732
5733 . = . ;
5734 start_of_data = . ;
5735 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5736 end_of_data = . ;
5737@}
5738@end smallexample
5739
5740Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5741@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5742
252b5132
RH
5743@need 2000
5744@node Operators
5745@subsection Operators
5746@cindex operators for arithmetic
5747@cindex arithmetic operators
5748@cindex precedence in expressions
5749The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5750the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5751@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5752@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5753@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5754@smallexample
5755precedence associativity Operators Notes
5756(highest)
57571 left ! - ~ (1)
57582 left * / %
57593 left + -
57604 left >> <<
57615 left == != > < <= >=
57626 left &
57637 left |
57648 left &&
57659 left ||
576610 right ? :
576711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5768(lowest)
5769@end smallexample
5770Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5771(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5772(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5773@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5774@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5775@tex
5776\vskip \baselineskip
5777%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5778\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5779\hrule
5780\halign
5781{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5782height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5783&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5784height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5785\noalign{\hrule}
5786height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5787&highest&&&&&\cr
5788% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5789&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5790&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5791&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5792&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5793&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5794&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5795&7&&left&&|&\cr
5796&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5797&9&&left&&||&\cr
5798&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5799&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5800&lowest&&&&&\cr
5801height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5802\hrule}
5803@end tex
5804@iftex
5805{
5806@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5807@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5808@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5809}
5810@end iftex
5811@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5812
5813@node Evaluation
5814@subsection Evaluation
5815@cindex lazy evaluation
5816@cindex expression evaluation order
5817The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5818an expression when absolutely necessary.
5819
5820The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5821address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5822regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5823as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5824
5825However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5826until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5827other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5828for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5829
5830The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5831assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5832allocation.
5833
5834Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5835@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5836
5837If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5838available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5839following
5840@smallexample
5841@group
5842SECTIONS
5843 @{
a1ab1d2a 5844 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5845 @{ *(.text) @}
5846 @}
5847@end group
5848@end smallexample
5849@noindent
5850will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5851address}.
5852
5853@node Expression Section
5854@subsection The Section of an Expression
5855@cindex expression sections
5856@cindex absolute expressions
5857@cindex relative expressions
5858@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5859@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5860@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5861Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5862relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5863using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5864value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5865symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5866operations.
5867
abf4be64
AM
5868Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5869section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5870address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5871@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5872functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5873One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5874(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5875differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5876versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5877section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5878Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5879absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5880given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5881everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5882
5883In the following simple example,
252b5132 5884
7542af2a
AM
5885@smallexample
5886@group
5887SECTIONS
5888 @{
5889 . = 0x100;
5890 __executable_start = 0x100;
5891 .data :
5892 @{
5893 . = 0x10;
5894 __data_start = 0x10;
5895 *(.data)
5896 @}
5897 @dots{}
5898 @}
5899@end group
5900@end smallexample
252b5132 5901
7542af2a
AM
5902both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5903address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5904@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5905section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5906
5c3049d2
AM
5907For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5908addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5909
5910@itemize @bullet
5911@item
c05f749e
AM
5912Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5913operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5914absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5915@item
7542af2a
AM
5916Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5917relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5918and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5919@item
c05f749e
AM
5920Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5921in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5922address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5923before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5924@end itemize
5925
5926The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5927
5928@itemize @bullet
5929@item
5930An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5931@item
5932The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5933@item
9bc8bb33 5934The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5935relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5936(after above conversions) is also a number.
5937@item
5938The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5939relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5940section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5941@item
5942The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5943conversions) is an absolute address.
5944@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5945
5946You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5947to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5948create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5949section @samp{.data}:
5950@smallexample
5951SECTIONS
5952 @{
5953 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5954 @}
5955@end smallexample
5956@noindent
5957If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5958@samp{.data} section.
5959
7542af2a
AM
5960Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5961particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5962
252b5132
RH
5963@node Builtin Functions
5964@subsection Builtin Functions
5965@cindex functions in expressions
5966The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5967use in linker script expressions.
5968
5969@table @code
5970@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5971@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5972@cindex expression, absolute
5973Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5974of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5975value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5976normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5977
5978@item ADDR(@var{section})
5979@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5980@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5981Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5982script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5983the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5984@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5985@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5986the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5987@smallexample
5988@group
5989SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5990 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5991 @{
252b5132
RH
5992 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5993 @dots{}
5994 @}
5995 .output :
5996 @{
5997 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5998 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5999 @}
6000@dots{} @}
6001@end group
6002@end smallexample
6003
876f4090
NS
6004@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6005@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6006@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6007@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6008@cindex round up location counter
6009@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6010@cindex round up expression
6011@cindex align expression
6012Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6013to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6014doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6015arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6016expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6017equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6018
6019Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6020next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6021variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6022input sections:
252b5132
RH
6023@smallexample
6024@group
6025SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6026 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6027 *(.data)
6028 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6029 @}
6030@dots{} @}
6031@end group
6032@end smallexample
6033@noindent
6034The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6035a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6036a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6037of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6038
6039The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6040
362c1d1a
NS
6041@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6042@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6043@cindex section alignment
6044Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6045been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6046evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6047the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6048value in that section.
6049@smallexample
6050@group
6051SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6052 .output @{
6053 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6054 @dots{}
6055 @}
6056@dots{} @}
6057@end group
6058@end smallexample
6059
252b5132
RH
6060@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6061@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6062This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6063scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6064section.
6065
2d20f7bf
JJ
6066@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6067@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6068This is equivalent to either
6069@smallexample
6070(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6071@end smallexample
6072or
6073@smallexample
6074(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6075@end smallexample
6076@noindent
6077depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6078for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6079@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6080If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6081memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6082bytes in the on-disk file.
6083
6084This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6085any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6086@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6087be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6088working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6089
6090@noindent
6091Example:
6092@smallexample
6093 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6094@end smallexample
6095
6096@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6097@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6098This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6099evaluation purposes.
6100
6101@smallexample
6102 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6103@end smallexample
6104
a4f5ad88
JJ
6105@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6106@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6107This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6108@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6109When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6110does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6111@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6112boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6113it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6114@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6115padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6116section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6117
6118@smallexample
6119 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6120@end smallexample
6121
252b5132
RH
6122@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6123@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6124@cindex symbol defaults
6125Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6126defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6127return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6128default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6129shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6130the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6131existed, its value is preserved:
6132
6133@smallexample
6134@group
6135SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6136 .text : @{
6137 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6138 @dots{}
6139 @}
6140 @dots{}
6141@}
6142@end group
6143@end smallexample
6144
3ec57632
NC
6145@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6146@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6147Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6148
252b5132
RH
6149@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6150@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6151@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6152Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6153Section LMA}).
6154
2e53f7d6
NC
6155@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6156@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6157Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6158@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6159
252b5132
RH
6160@kindex MAX
6161@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6162Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6163
6164@kindex MIN
6165@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6166Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6167
6168@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6169@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6170@cindex unallocated address, next
6171Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6172This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6173use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6174output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6175
3ec57632
NC
6176@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6177@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6178Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6179
ba916c8a
MM
6180@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6181@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6182Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6183value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6184@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6185will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6186can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6187``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6188name.
6189
252b5132
RH
6190@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6191@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6192@cindex section size
6193Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6194been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6195evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6196@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6197@smallexample
6198@group
6199SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6200 .output @{
6201 .start = . ;
6202 @dots{}
6203 .end = . ;
6204 @}
6205 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6206 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6207@dots{} @}
6208@end group
6209@end smallexample
6210
6211@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6212@itemx sizeof_headers
6213@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6214@cindex header size
6215Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6216information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6217this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6218choose, to facilitate paging.
6219
6220@cindex not enough room for program headers
6221@cindex program headers, not enough room
6222When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6223@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6224number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6225addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6226additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6227room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6228the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6229script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6230you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6231command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6232@end table
6233
6234@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6235@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6236@cindex implicit linker scripts
6237If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6238an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6239linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6240linker will report an error.
6241
6242An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6243
6244Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6245assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6246commands.
6247
6248Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6249at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6250read. This can affect archive searching.
6251
6252@ifset GENERIC
6253@node Machine Dependent
6254@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6255
6256@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6257@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6258sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6259functionality are not listed.
6260
6261@menu
36f63dca
NC
6262@ifset H8300
6263* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6264@end ifset
6265@ifset I960
6266* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6267@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6268@ifset M68HC11
6269* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6270@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6271@ifset ARM
6272* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6273@end ifset
6274@ifset HPPA
6275* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6276@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6277@ifset M68K
6278* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6279@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6280@ifset MIPS
6281* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6282@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6283@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6284* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6285@end ifset
2469cfa2 6286@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6287* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6288@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6289@ifset NDS32
6290* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6291@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6292@ifset NIOSII
6293* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6294@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6295@ifset POWERPC
6296* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6297@end ifset
6298@ifset POWERPC64
6299* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6300@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6301@ifset SPU
6302* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6303@end ifset
74459f0e 6304@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6305* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6306@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6307@ifset WIN32
6308* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6309@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6310@ifset XTENSA
6311* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6312@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6313@end menu
6314@end ifset
6315
252b5132
RH
6316@ifset H8300
6317@ifclear GENERIC
6318@raisesections
6319@end ifclear
6320
6321@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6322@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6323
6324@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6325For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6326you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6327
6328@table @emph
6329@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6330@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6331@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6332targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6333program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6334respectively.
6335
6336@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6337@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6338@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6339@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6340sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6341page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6342(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6343@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6344top page of memory).
1502569c 6345
81f5558e
NC
6346@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6347indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6348displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6349the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6350@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6351whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6352range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6353
1502569c 6354@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6355@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6356biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6357which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6358page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6359(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6360@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6361the top page of memory).
6362
6363@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6364@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
636532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6366changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6367(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6368@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6369the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6370@end table
6371
6372@ifclear GENERIC
6373@lowersections
6374@end ifclear
6375@end ifset
6376
36f63dca 6377@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6378@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6379@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6380@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6381@node Renesas
6382@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6383
c2dcd04e
NC
6384@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6385H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6386options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6387@end ifset
6388@end ifclear
6389
6390@ifset I960
6391@ifclear GENERIC
6392@raisesections
6393@end ifclear
6394
6395@node i960
6396@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6397
6398@cindex i960 support
6399
6400You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6401specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6402family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6403incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6404linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6405libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6406search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6407
6408For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6409well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6410paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6411the names
6412
6413@smallexample
6414@group
6415try
6416libtry.a
6417tryca
6418libtryca.a
6419@end group
6420@end smallexample
6421
6422@noindent
6423The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6424two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6425
6426You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6427the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6428use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6429specifies a library.
6430
6431@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6432@cindex relaxing on i960
6433@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6434you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6435@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6436them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6437instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6438instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6439target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6440not itself call any subroutines).
6441
6442@ifclear GENERIC
6443@lowersections
6444@end ifclear
6445@end ifset
6446
6447@ifset ARM
6448@ifclear GENERIC
6449@raisesections
6450@end ifclear
6451
93fd0973
SC
6452@ifset M68HC11
6453@ifclear GENERIC
6454@raisesections
6455@end ifclear
6456
6457@node M68HC11/68HC12
6458@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6459
6460@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6461
6462@subsection Linker Relaxation
6463
6464For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6465optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6466
6467@table @emph
6468@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6469@item relaxing address modes
6470@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6471targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6472program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6473respectively.
6474
6475@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6476transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6477page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6478
6479@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6480When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6481of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6482addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6483@code{bset} instructions.
6484
6485@end table
6486
6487@subsection Trampoline Generation
6488
6489@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6490@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6491For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6492call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6493will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6494trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6495case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6496point to the function trampoline.
6497
6498@ifclear GENERIC
6499@lowersections
6500@end ifclear
6501@end ifset
6502
36f63dca 6503@node ARM
3674e28a 6504@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6505
6506@cindex ARM interworking support
6507@kindex --support-old-code
6508For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6509between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6510been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6511line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6512libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6513option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6514given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6515which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6516the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6517non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6518
6519@cindex thumb entry point
6520@cindex entry point, thumb
6521@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6522The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6523@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6524But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6525branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6526executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6527
ce11ba6c
KT
6528@cindex PE import table prefixing
6529@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6530The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6531the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6532element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6533import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6534
e489d0ae
PB
6535@cindex BE8
6536@kindex --be8
6537The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6538executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6539objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6540option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6541little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6542
3674e28a
PB
6543@cindex TARGET1
6544@kindex --target1-rel
6545@kindex --target1-abs
6546The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6547@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6548or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6549and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6550
6551@cindex TARGET2
6552@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6553The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6554@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6555meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6556@table @samp
6557@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6558@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6559@item abs
6560@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6561@item got-rel
6562@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6563@end table
6564
319850b4
JB
6565@cindex FIX_V4BX
6566@kindex --fix-v4bx
6567The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6568specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6569interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6570also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6571
6572In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6573linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6574@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6575
6576In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6577relocations are ignored.
6578
845b51d6
PB
6579@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6580@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6581Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6582relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6583
6584@smallexample
6585TST rM, #1
6586MOVEQ PC, rM
6587BX Rn
6588@end smallexample
6589
6590This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6591and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6592condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6593
33bfe774
JB
6594@cindex USE_BLX
6595@kindex --use-blx
6596The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6597BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6598situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6599code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6600each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6601
6602This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6603specify it if you are using that target.
6604
c6dd86c6
JB
6605@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6606@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6607The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6608bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6609instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6610to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6611the support code can read the intended values.
6612
6613The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6614intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6615and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6616intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6617full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6618you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6619
6620If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6621enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6622@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6623mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6624vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6625@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6626
6627If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6628potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6629such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6630first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6631instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6632the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6633are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6634
2de70689
MGD
6635@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6636@kindex --fix-arm1176
6637@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6638The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6639in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6640are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6641unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6642
9d5777a3 6643Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6644Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6645http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6646
bf21ed78
MS
6647@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6648@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6649The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6650warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6651enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6652linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6653using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6654not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6655
6656@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6657@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6658The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6659warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6660@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6661linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6662using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6663
726150b7
NC
6664@cindex PIC_VENEER
6665@kindex --pic-veneer
6666The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6667ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6668is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6669@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6670
6671@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6672@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6673The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6674code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6675perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6676placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6677controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6678The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6679duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6680group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6681code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6682where they should be placed.
6683
6684The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6685@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6686placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6687branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6688placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6689value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6690exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6691A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6692linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6693from the input sections.
6694
6695The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6696@samp{N = +1}.
6697
1a51c1a4
NC
6698Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6699only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6700otherwise.
6701
1db37fe6
YG
6702@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6703@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6704@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6705The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6706
6707The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6708
68fcca92
JW
6709@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6710@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6711@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6712The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6713
6714Please contact ARM for further details.
6715
1db37fe6
YG
6716@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6717@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6718@cindex Merging exidx entries
6719The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6720
6721@kindex --long-plt
6722@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6723The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6724which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6725entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6726
36f63dca
NC
6727@ifclear GENERIC
6728@lowersections
6729@end ifclear
6730@end ifset
6731
6732@ifset HPPA
6733@ifclear GENERIC
6734@raisesections
6735@end ifclear
6736
6737@node HPPA ELF32
6738@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6739@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6740@kindex --multi-subspace
6741When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6742import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6743The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6744stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6745multiple sub-spaces.
6746
6747@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6748@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6749Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6750stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6751@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6752sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6753a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6754the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6755conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6756prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6757A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6758branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6759@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6760@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6761detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6762positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6763
6764Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6765single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6766create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6767large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6768
6769@ifclear GENERIC
6770@lowersections
6771@end ifclear
6772@end ifset
6773
7fb9f789
NC
6774@ifset M68K
6775@ifclear GENERIC
6776@raisesections
6777@end ifclear
6778
6779@node M68K
6780@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6781
6782@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6783@kindex --got=@var{type}
6784The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6785The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6786@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6787the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6788@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6789entries only at non-negative offsets.
6790@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6791entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6792support such GOTs.
6793@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6794output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6795file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6796files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6797
6798@ifclear GENERIC
6799@lowersections
6800@end ifclear
6801@end ifset
6802
833794fc
MR
6803@ifset MIPS
6804@ifclear GENERIC
6805@raisesections
6806@end ifclear
6807
6808@node MIPS
6809@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6810
6811@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6812@kindex --insn32
6813@kindex --no-insn32
6814The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6815microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6816in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6817used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6818or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6819including 16-bit ones where possible.
6820
6821@ifclear GENERIC
6822@lowersections
6823@end ifclear
6824@end ifset
6825
36f63dca
NC
6826@ifset MMIX
6827@ifclear GENERIC
6828@raisesections
6829@end ifclear
6830
6831@node MMIX
6832@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6833For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6834@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6835understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6836can translate between the two formats.
6837
6838There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6839Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6840registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6841equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6842@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6843global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6844this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6845symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6846
7a2de473
HPN
6847Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6848@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6849The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6850of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6851
6852Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6853are left out from an mmo file.
6854
6855@ifclear GENERIC
6856@lowersections
6857@end ifclear
6858@end ifset
6859
6860@ifset MSP430
6861@ifclear GENERIC
6862@raisesections
6863@end ifclear
6864
6865@node MSP430
6866@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6867For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6868will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6869just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6870
6871@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6872The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6873
6874@table @code
6875@item @samp{.vectors}
6876Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6877
6878@item @samp{.bootloader}
6879Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6880in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6881
6882@item @samp{.infomem}
6883Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6884this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6885
c0065db7 6886@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6887This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6888in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6889
6890@item @samp{.noinit}
6891Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6892
c0065db7 6893The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6894@end table
6895
6896@ifclear GENERIC
6897@lowersections
6898@end ifclear
6899@end ifset
6900
35c08157
KLC
6901@ifset NDS32
6902@ifclear GENERIC
6903@raisesections
6904@end ifclear
6905
6906@node NDS32
6907@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6908@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6909For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6910relaxes objects according to these options.
6911
6912@table @code
6913@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6914Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6915
6916@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6917Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6918
6919@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6920Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6921
6922@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6923Export the EX9 table after linking.
6924
6925@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6926Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6927
6928@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6929Update the existing EX9 table.
6930
6931@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6932Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6933
6934@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6935Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6936
6937@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6938Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6939
6940@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6941Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6942@end table
6943
6944@ifclear GENERIC
6945@lowersections
6946@end ifclear
6947@end ifset
6948
78058a5e
SL
6949@ifset NIOSII
6950@ifclear GENERIC
6951@raisesections
6952@end ifclear
6953
6954@node Nios II
6955@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6956@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6957@kindex --relax on Nios II
6958
6959Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6960transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6961which may result in @command{ld} giving
6962@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6963The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6964trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6965outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6966trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6967be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6968larger than 256MB.
6969
6970The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6971is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6972@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6973locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6974source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6975register as a temporary.
6976
6977Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6978relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6979option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6980
6981@ifclear GENERIC
6982@lowersections
6983@end ifclear
6984@end ifset
6985
2a60a7a8
AM
6986@ifset POWERPC
6987@ifclear GENERIC
6988@raisesections
6989@end ifclear
6990
6991@node PowerPC ELF32
6992@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6993@cindex PowerPC long branches
6994@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6995Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6996displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6997@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6998@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6999the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7000section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7001section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7002@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7003both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7004considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7005
7006@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7007@table @option
7008@cindex PowerPC PLT
7009@kindex --bss-plt
7010@item --bss-plt
7011Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7012generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7013the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7014writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7015@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7016PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7017compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7018BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7019
016687f8
AM
7020@kindex --secure-plt
7021@item --secure-plt
7022@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7023@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7024when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7025layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7026style BSS PLT.
7027
2a60a7a8
AM
7028@cindex PowerPC GOT
7029@kindex --sdata-got
7030@item --sdata-got
7031The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7032sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7033@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7034section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7035@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7036@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7037@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7038@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7039PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7040pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7041GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7042really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7043
7044@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7045@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7046@item --emit-stub-syms
7047This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7048symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7049
7050@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7051@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7052@item --no-tls-optimize
7053PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7054sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7055disable the optimization.
7056@end table
7057
7058@ifclear GENERIC
7059@lowersections
7060@end ifclear
7061@end ifset
7062
7063@ifset POWERPC64
7064@ifclear GENERIC
7065@raisesections
7066@end ifclear
7067
7068@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7069@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7070
7071@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7072@table @option
7073@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7074@kindex --stub-group-size
7075@item --stub-group-size
7076Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7077by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7078@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7079sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7080a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7081the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7082conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7083prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7084A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7085branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7086@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7087@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7088detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7089positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7090
7091Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7092single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7093create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7094large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7095
7096@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7097@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7098@item --emit-stub-syms
7099This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7100symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7101
7102@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7103@kindex --dotsyms
7104@kindex --no-dotsyms
7105@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
7106These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7107in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7108function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7109code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7110properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7111to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7112@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7113dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7114feature.
7115
7116@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7117@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7118@item --no-tls-optimize
7119PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7120sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7121disable the optimization.
7122
7123@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7124@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7125@item --no-opd-optimize
7126PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7127corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7128the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7129Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7130
7131@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7132@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7133@item --non-overlapping-opd
7134Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7135@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7136the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7137entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7138
7139@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7140@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7141@item --no-toc-optimize
7142PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7143entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7144reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7145marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7146marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7147relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7148unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7149reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7150discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7151reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7152code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7153optimization.
7154
7155@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7156@kindex --no-multi-toc
7157@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7158If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7159@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7160where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7161entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7162total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7163grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7164TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7165calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7166help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
716764K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7168Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7169
7170@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7171@kindex --no-toc-sort
7172@item --no-toc-sort
7173By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7174happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7175placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7176with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7177referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7178@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7179results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7180off this feature.
7181
7182@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7183@kindex --plt-align
7184@kindex --no-plt-align
7185@item --plt-align
7186@itemx --no-plt-align
7187Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7188padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7189specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7190that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7191stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7192
7193@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7194@kindex --plt-static-chain
7195@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7196@item --plt-static-chain
7197@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7198Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7199chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7200chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7201
7202@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7203@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7204@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7205@item --plt-thread-safe
7206@itemx --no-thread-safe
7207With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7208lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7209another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7210order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7211memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7212barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7213looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7214seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7215default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7216@end table
7217
7218@ifclear GENERIC
7219@lowersections
7220@end ifclear
7221@end ifset
7222
49fa1e15
AM
7223@ifset SPU
7224@ifclear GENERIC
7225@raisesections
7226@end ifclear
7227
7228@node SPU ELF
7229@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7230
7231@cindex SPU ELF options
7232@table @option
7233
7234@cindex SPU plugins
7235@kindex --plugin
7236@item --plugin
7237This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7238
7239@cindex SPU overlays
7240@kindex --no-overlays
7241@item --no-overlays
7242Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7243regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7244@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7245turns off all this special overlay handling.
7246
7247@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7248@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7249@item --emit-stub-syms
7250This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7251symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7252
7253@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7254@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7255@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7256This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7257function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7258on calls to non-overlay regions.
7259
7260@cindex SPU local store size
7261@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7262@item --local-store=lo:hi
7263@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7264the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7265range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7266
c0065db7 7267@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7268@kindex --stack-analysis
7269@item --stack-analysis
7270SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7271unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7272under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7273@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7274@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7275determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7276for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7277for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7278for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7279find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7280and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7281under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7282dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7283is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7284and calls will be given.
7285
c0065db7 7286@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7287@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7288@item --emit-stack-syms
7289This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7290in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7291These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7292functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7293functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7294such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7295The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7296@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7297@end table
7298
7299@ifclear GENERIC
7300@lowersections
7301@end ifclear
7302@end ifset
7303
36f63dca
NC
7304@ifset TICOFF
7305@ifclear GENERIC
7306@raisesections
7307@end ifclear
7308
7309@node TI COFF
7310@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7311@cindex TI COFF versions
7312@kindex --format=@var{version}
7313The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7314TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7315also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7316format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7317header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7318
7319@ifclear GENERIC
7320@lowersections
7321@end ifclear
7322@end ifset
7323
2ca22b03
NC
7324@ifset WIN32
7325@ifclear GENERIC
7326@raisesections
7327@end ifclear
7328
7329@node WIN32
7330@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7331
c0065db7 7332This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7333See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7334command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7335
7336@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7337@cindex import libraries
7338@item import libraries
69da35b5 7339The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7340libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7341regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7342archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7343support for creating such libraries provided with the
7344@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7345
c0065db7
RM
7346@item exporting DLL symbols
7347@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7348The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7349
7350@table @emph
7351@item using auto-export functionality
7352@cindex using auto-export functionality
7353By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7354which is controlled by the following command line options:
7355
0a5d968e
NC
7356@itemize
7357@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7358@item --exclude-symbols
7359@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7360@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7361@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7362@end itemize
7363
09e2aba4
DK
7364When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7365(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7366symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7367often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7368private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7369options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7370exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7371final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7372
7373If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7374command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7375if either of the following are true:
7376
7377@itemize
7378@item A DEF file is used.
7379@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7380@end itemize
dc8465bf 7381
c0065db7
RM
7382@item using a DEF file
7383@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7384Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7385an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7386exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7387name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7388command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7389
7390@example
7391gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7392@end example
7393
0a5d968e
NC
7394Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7395@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7396
dc8465bf
NC
7397Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7398
7399@example
4b5bd4e7 7400LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7401
7402EXPORTS
7403foo
7404bar
7405_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7406another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7407var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7408doo = foo == foo2
7409eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7410@end example
dc8465bf 7411
7fcab871 7412This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7413symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7414alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7415by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7416@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7417@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7418export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7419in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7420symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7421
6b31ad16
DS
7422The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7423name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7424the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7425
b45619c0
NC
7426When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7427library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7428@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7429executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7430
7431With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7432specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7433non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7434
7435If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7436or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7437filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7438
4b5bd4e7
DS
7439The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7440
7441@example
7442EXPORTS
7443 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7444 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7445 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7446@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7447
7448Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7449@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7450@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7451@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7452Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7453@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7454string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7455
7456The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7457
7458@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7459will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7460by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7461linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7462library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7463
7464@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7465The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7466the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7467@code{*_imp__foo}).
7468
7469@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7470well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7471read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7472variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7473the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7474extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7475application will behave unexpectedly.
7476
7477@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7478it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7479symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7480API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7481the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7482
4b5bd4e7
DS
7483See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7484other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7485
7486@cindex creating a DEF file
7487While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7488with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7489
7490@item Using decorations
7491@cindex Using decorations
7492Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7493itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7494declared as:
7495
7496@example
7497__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7498__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7499@end example
7500
7501All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7502any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7503this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7504the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7505
7506Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7507decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7508instead:
7509
7510@example
7511__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7512__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7513@end example
7514
c0065db7
RM
7515This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7516when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7517variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7518code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7519of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7520omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7521@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7522information.
c0065db7 7523@end table
dc8465bf 7524
2ca22b03
NC
7525@cindex automatic data imports
7526@item automatic data imports
7527The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7528by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7529compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7530issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7531code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7532c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7533initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7534decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7535platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7536command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7537The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7538suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7539trigger the feature's use.
7540
c0065db7 7541auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7542additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7543
c0065db7 7544"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7545documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7546
c0065db7
RM
7547The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7548occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7549One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7550below.
7551
7552@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7553For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7554object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7555offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7556field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7557in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7558without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7559The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7560references.
7561
c0065db7
RM
7562The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7563be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7564themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7565runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7566compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7567support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7568run without error on an older system.
7569
c0065db7
RM
7570@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7571enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7572
7573@cindex direct linking to a dll
7574@item direct linking to a dll
7575The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7576including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7577libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7578traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7579libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7580function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7581though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7582storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7583tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7584large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7585
c0065db7 7586Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7587@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7588of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7589perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7590select the dll instead of an import library.
7591
2ca22b03 7592
69da35b5
NC
7593For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7594to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7595
7596@example
45e948fe
NC
7597libxxx.dll.a
7598xxx.dll.a
7599libxxx.a
7600xxx.lib
69da35b5 7601cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7602libxxx.dll
7603xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7604@end example
7605
69da35b5
NC
7606before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7607
c0065db7
RM
7608(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7609where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7610@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7611file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7612@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7613
c0065db7
RM
7614Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7615@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7616was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7617various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7618could coexist on the same machine.
7619
2ca22b03
NC
7620The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7621applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7622libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7623
7624@example
7625bin/
7626 cygxxx.dll
7627lib/
7628 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7629 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7630@end example
7631
c0065db7
RM
7632Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7633done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7634
76351. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7636@example
7637gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7638@end example
2ca22b03 7639
69da35b5
NC
7640However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7641(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7642@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7643not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7644
2ca22b03
NC
76452. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7646directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7647should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7648making the app/dll.
7649
7650@example
7651ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7652@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7653
7654Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7655
7656@example
7657gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7658@end example
69da35b5
NC
7659
7660This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7661perfectly legal
7662
7663@example
7664bin/
7665 cygxxx-5.dll
7666lib/
c0065db7 7667 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7668@end example
7669
dc8465bf 7670Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7671even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7672@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7673
7674Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7675wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7676
76771. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7678work with auto-imported data.
7679
dc8465bf
NC
76802. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7681import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7682symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7683for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7684possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7685
45e948fe
NC
76863. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7687critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7688in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7689stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7690
69da35b5 7691So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7692true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7693a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7694binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7695massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7696requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7697will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7698
c0065db7 7699@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7700@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7701@item adding additional names
7702Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7703A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7704exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7705when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7706import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7707
c0065db7 7708@example
dc8465bf
NC
7709LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7710
7711EXPORTS
c0065db7 7712foo
dc8465bf 7713_foo = foo
c0065db7 7714@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7715
7716The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7717
7718Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7719source code using the "weak" attribute:
7720
c0065db7
RM
7721@example
7722void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7723void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7724@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7725
7726See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7727symbols.
7728
7729@item renaming symbols
7730Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7731kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7732@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7733DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7734created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7735
c0065db7 7736@example
dc8465bf
NC
7737LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7738
7739EXPORTS
7740_foo = foo
c0065db7 7741@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7742
7743The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7744@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7745@end table
dc8465bf 7746
0a5d968e 7747Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7748unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7749If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7750@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7751that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7752@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7753renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7754to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7755the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7756In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7757which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7758
7759@cindex weak externals
7760@item weak externals
7761The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7762weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7763defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7764are three variants of weak externals:
7765@itemize
7766@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7767called lazy externals.
7768@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7769This form is not presently implemented.
7770@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7771implemented.
7772@end itemize
7773As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7774are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7775uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7776
7777@cindex aligned common symbols
7778@item aligned common symbols
7779As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7780desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7781the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7782carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7783by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7784tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7785but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7786warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7787
2ca22b03
NC
7788@end table
7789
7790@ifclear GENERIC
7791@lowersections
7792@end ifclear
7793@end ifset
7794
e0001a05
NC
7795@ifset XTENSA
7796@ifclear GENERIC
7797@raisesections
7798@end ifclear
7799
7800@node Xtensa
7801@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7802
7803@cindex Xtensa processors
7804The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7805@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7806specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7807keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7808example, with the command:
7809
7810@smallexample
7811SECTIONS
7812@{
7813 .text : @{
7814 *(.literal .text)
7815 @}
7816@}
7817@end smallexample
7818
7819@noindent
7820@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7821and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7822literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7823interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7824group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7825files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7826and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7827
43cd72b9 7828@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7829@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7830Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7831provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7832is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7833literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7834will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7835location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7836the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7837unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7838@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7839range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7840
7841For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7842to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7843instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7844instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7845instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7846@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7847hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7848By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7849switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7850density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7851instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7852performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7853linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7854a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7855
7856The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7857control the linker:
7858
7859@cindex Xtensa options
7860@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7861@item --size-opt
7862When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7863more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7864no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7865alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7866preserve the correctness of the code.
7867@end table
e0001a05
NC
7868
7869@ifclear GENERIC
7870@lowersections
7871@end ifclear
7872@end ifset
7873
252b5132
RH
7874@ifclear SingleFormat
7875@node BFD
7876@chapter BFD
7877
7878@cindex back end
7879@cindex object file management
7880@cindex object formats available
7881@kindex objdump -i
7882The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7883These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7884object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7885format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7886it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7887associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7888object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7889(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7890list all the formats available for your configuration.
7891
7892@cindex BFD requirements
7893@cindex requirements for BFD
7894As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7895several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7896BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7897formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7898been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7899BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7900may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7901
7902One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7903mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7904useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7905conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7906
7907@menu
7908* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7909@end menu
7910
7911@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7912@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7913@cindex opening object files
7914@include bfdsumm.texi
7915@end ifclear
7916
7917@node Reporting Bugs
7918@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7919@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7920@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7921
ff5dcc92 7922Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7923
7924Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7925it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7926to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7927work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7928@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7929
7930In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7931information that enables us to fix the bug.
7932
7933@menu
7934* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7935* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7936@end menu
7937
7938@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7939@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7940@cindex bug criteria
7941
7942If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7943
7944@itemize @bullet
7945@cindex fatal signal
7946@cindex linker crash
7947@cindex crash of linker
7948@item
7949If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7950@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7951
7952@cindex error on valid input
7953@item
ff5dcc92 7954If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7955
7956@cindex invalid input
7957@item
ff5dcc92 7958If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7959may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7960object files are correct.
7961
7962@item
7963If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7964improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7965@end itemize
7966
7967@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7968@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7969@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7970@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7971
7972A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7973products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7974recommend you contact that organization first.
7975
7976You can find contact information for many support companies and
7977individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7978distribution.
7979
ad22bfe8 7980@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7981Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7982@value{BUGURL}.
7983@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7984
7985The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7986@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7987fact or leave it out, state it!
7988
7989Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7990problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7991assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7992matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7993the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7994location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7995were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7996into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7997specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7998and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7999
8000Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8001the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8002on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8003
8004Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8005bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8006respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8007You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8008
8009To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8010
8011@itemize @bullet
8012@item
ff5dcc92 8013The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8014the @samp{--version} argument.
8015
8016Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8017the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8018
8019@item
ff5dcc92 8020Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8021patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8022
8023@item
8024The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8025version number.
8026
8027@item
ff5dcc92 8028What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8029``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8030
8031@item
8032The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8033observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8034list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8035sufficient.
8036
8037If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8038and then we might not encounter the bug.
8039
8040@item
8041A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8042bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8043provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8044bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8045state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8046requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8047we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8048attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8049
8050If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8051@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8052object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8053@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8054how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8055
8056@item
8057A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8058incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8059
ff5dcc92 8060Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8061will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8062not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8063a chance to make a mistake.
8064
8065Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8066say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8067copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8068C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8069and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8070fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8071you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8072any conclusion from our observations.
8073
8074@item
ff5dcc92 8075If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8076diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8077@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8078If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8079context, not by line number.
8080
8081The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8082sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8083@end itemize
8084
8085Here are some things that are not necessary:
8086
8087@itemize @bullet
8088@item
8089A description of the envelope of the bug.
8090
8091Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8092which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8093changes will not affect it.
8094
8095This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8096will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8097with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8098We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8099
8100Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8101of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8102output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8103less time, and so on.
8104
8105However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8106report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8107
8108@item
8109A patch for the bug.
8110
8111A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8112the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8113a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8114to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8115
ff5dcc92 8116Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8117construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8118through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8119able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8120fixed.
8121
8122And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8123patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8124help us to understand.
8125
8126@item
8127A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8128
8129Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8130things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8131@end itemize
8132
8133@node MRI
8134@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8135@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8136To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8137linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8138alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8139described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8140simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8141@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8142linker commands; these commands are described here.
8143
8144In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8145file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8146features to make use of them.
8147
8148You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8149@samp{-c} command-line option.
8150
8151Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8152command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8153blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8154MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8155issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8156
8157Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8158
8159You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8160lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8161The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8162
8163@table @code
8164@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8165@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8166@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8167Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8168the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8169@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8170your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8171script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8172commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8173input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8174@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8175
8176@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8177@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8178Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8179in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8180
8181@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8182
8183@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8184@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8185Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8186@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8187
8188@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8189@item BASE @var{expression}
8190Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8191absolute addresses) in the output file.
8192
8193@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8194@item CHIP @var{expression}
8195@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8196This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8197
8198@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8199@item END
8200This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8201
8202@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8203@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8204Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8205language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8206
8207@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8208@item
252b5132
RH
8209S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8210
8211@item
8212IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8213
8214@item
8215COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8216@samp{COFF}
8217@end enumerate
8218
8219@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8220@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8221Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8222@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8223
8224The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8225same line, with no change in its effect.
8226
8227@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8228@item LOAD @var{filename}
8229@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8230Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8231same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8232command line.
8233
8234@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8235@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8236@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8237MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8238option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8239
8240@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8241@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8242@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8243Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8244order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8245script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8246sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8247file, in the order specified.
8248
8249@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8250@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8251@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8252@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8253Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8254@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8255
8256@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8257@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8258@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8259@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8260You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8261specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8262If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8263@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8264@end table
8265
793c5807
NC
8266@node GNU Free Documentation License
8267@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8268@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8269
370b66a1
CD
8270@node LD Index
8271@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8272
8273@printindex cp
8274
8275@tex
7ca01ed9 8276% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8277% meantime:
8278\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8279\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8280\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8281\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8282\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8283\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8284\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8285\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8286\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8287% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8288@end tex
8289
252b5132 8290@bye
This page took 2.617132 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.